JP7765840B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines (pinball gaming machines) and slot machines (slot machines).

Gaming machines that display variable identifiers (e.g., special symbols) and can be controlled to enter a special game state advantageous to the player are known. Some gaming machines of this type execute various effects while the variable identifiers are displayed, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of entering the special game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-000417

The effects that are executed while the identification information is being displayed variably play an important role in increasing interest in the game, but there is still room for improvement in order to increase interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase gaming interest.

To solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention employs the following measures.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to a player by displaying a variable indication of identification information based on acquisition information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition ,
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period;
a storage means for storing the acquired information as pending information;
a storage display means for displaying a storage display in accordance with the hold information stored in the storage means;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect that displays the stored display in a display mode different from normal ;
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect so that an execution rate differs between a case where the period effect is executed and a case where the period effect is not executed ,
The second suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect after a predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed,
When the first suggestion effect is executed together with the period effect and the second suggestion effect is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period displayed by the period effect, the expectation level suggested by one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be higher than the expectation level suggested by the other suggestion effect,
The period effect execution means is capable of executing the period effect in any one of a plurality of display modes,
The ratio of the period effects being executed in a specific display mode among the plurality of display modes is configured to be different between when the special game state is controlled and when it is not controlled,
When the memory display is displayed in a special display mode due to the execution of the specific effect, the period effect can be executed in the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the memory display displayed in the special display mode.
The gist of this is as follows.

The gaming machine of the second means is the gaming machine of the first means described above,
There are a plurality of types of the special display mode, and when the memory display is displayed in the special display mode due to the execution of the specific effect, the rate at which the period effect is executed varies depending on the type of the special display mode.
The gist of this is as follows.

The present invention described above can increase gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing the displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. This is a table showing the correspondence between the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the jackpot opening. 10 is a table showing various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal pattern hit determination table, and (D) is a normal pattern change pattern selection table. This is a fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving states. This is a fluctuation pattern table for time-saving mode. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the processing when the starting ball is scored. 10 is a flowchart of a general operation process. 10 is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. This is a flowchart of the normal pattern correctness determination process. This is a flowchart of the normal pattern random number shift process. This is a flowchart of processing during normal pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of the normal symbol determination process. This is a flowchart of normal electric accessory processing. 10 is a flowchart of special chart operation processing. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not Special Chart 2 is correct. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not Special Chart 1 is correct. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing (jackpot game). 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. This is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. 10 is a flowchart of a power interruption monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing. 10 is a flowchart of the pending icon notification process. 10 is a flowchart of a timer effect process. 10 is a flowchart of the notification process at the start of fluctuations. 10 is a flowchart of a notification process when a reach is achieved. 10 is a flowchart of a notice process during SP development. 10 is an operation instruction performance determination table. This is a table for determining pending icon notice. (1) is timer effect execution determination table A, (2) is timer effect execution determination table B, (3) is timer effect execution determination table C, (4) is timer effect execution pattern determination table, and (5) is timer effect display pattern determination table. This is table A for determining the notice at the start of fluctuation. This is table B for determining the notice at the start of fluctuation. (1) is a notice determination table A when a reach is established, (2) is a notice determination table B when a reach is established, and (3) is a notice determination table C when a reach is established. (1) is SP development time advance notice determination table A, (2) is SP development time advance notice determination table B, and (3) is SP development time advance notice determination table C. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a hold icon. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of the presentation display when the SP reach presentation is executed. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of the presentation display when the timer presentation starts to be executed in conjunction with the start of the variable presentation due to the expiration of the timer reserve. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the effect display when the timer effect starts to be executed when the first stop pattern stops in a variable effect caused by the expiration of a timer hold. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of the effect display when the timer effect is started with the realization of a reach in the variable effect due to the consumption of the timer reserve. These are figures showing an example of a step-up preview, where (1) is a figure showing an example of the display of the performance image (stage image) for step 1, (2) is a figure showing an example of the display of the performance image (stage image) for step 2, and (3) is a figure showing an example of the display of the performance image (stage image) for step 3. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview. The following figures show examples of button previews, where (1) shows an example of the display when an operation instruction image is displayed and the effect button is operated, and (2) shows the types of effect images (suggestion images) that are displayed based on the operation of the effect button. These are figures showing examples of predictions when a reach is achieved, where (1) is a figure showing an example of the display of a first character prediction, (2) is a figure showing an example of the display of a second character prediction, and (3) is a figure showing an example of the display of a group prediction. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the presentation display when a title preview is executed. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the presentation display when a timer presentation, a notification at the start of the change, and a notification at the time of the reach being established are executed from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach. (A) is a diagram showing the movable performance member in an inoperative state (standby state), and (B) is a diagram showing the movable performance member in an operative state. A diagram showing the configuration of the performance hold information storage area.

Next, we will explain the embodiment of the present invention using examples. Below, we will explain an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (pinball gaming machine) in which the gaming medium used in the game is a gaming ball and the game can be progressed by firing the gaming ball toward the gaming board (playing area).

In the following description, the term "front" simply refers to the front side (near side) when viewing the gaming machine from the front, and is the side where the player is positioned when playing. The term "rear" simply refers to the back side (rear side) when viewing the gaming machine from the front. Furthermore, the terms "upper side," "lower side," "left side," and "right side" simply refer to the top, bottom, left, and right directions when viewing the gaming machine from the front, and refer to the top, bottom, left, and right sides in Figures 1 and 3, for example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a so-called "digital pachinko type" pachinko gaming machine that displays a variable special pattern based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting slot (also referred to as a "starting ball entry"). When the variable display results in the special pattern being displayed (stopped) in a pattern combination corresponding to a jackpot (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game (special game) can be played, in which a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls) is awarded to the player. Note that games that display a variable special pattern are also referred to as "pattern variable game" or "variable game."

[Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
1 to 3, a pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is configured to be detachable from the gaming machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the gaming board 2 removed from the gaming machine frame 50.

The gaming machine frame 50 is composed of a front frame 51 with a decorative surface, a main frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and other components are attached, and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the hall's island equipment. The front frame 51, main frame 52, and outer frame 53 are each pivotally supported at one end and are each configured to be able to open and close.

The front frame 51 is provided with a launch handle 60 for launching game balls with a launch strength that corresponds to the amount of operation (rotation angle) by the player, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 that can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the launching device, and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 that can store game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61.

The front frame 51 is also provided with a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during game effects that are executed as the game progresses, a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various lights depending on the game situation, and a speaker 67 that can output various sounds depending on the game situation. Either or both of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b are also referred to as the "effect button 63."

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with speakers 67, an upper left speaker 67L located at the upper left of the front frame 51, and an upper right speaker 67R located at the upper right of the front frame 51. The pair of left and right speakers 67L, 67R are capable of outputting stereo sound. Of course, it is also possible to output mono sound in addition to stereo sound.

The effect button 63 functions as an input means used by the player when making inputs, and also as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The player can use (operate) either the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b depending on the game situation and the type of game effect being executed. For example, if the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated while a game effect is being executed, a predetermined operation-related effect is executed based on that operation. In this embodiment, the first effect button 63a (also referred to as the "first input means" or "first operation means") is provided on the top surface (top surface) of the upper tray 61 of the front frame 51, and the second effect button 63b (also referred to as the "second input means" or "second operation means") is provided on the front left side of the lower tray 62.

The first effect button 63a is configured as a movable operating means that can be operated in a predetermined operating mode. In this embodiment, that operating mode is vibration. The vibration of the first effect button 63a can be achieved, for example, by configuring the first effect button 63a as an effect button unit (effect button device) that includes an eccentric motor (vibration motor) and driving the eccentric motor. The first effect button 63a, which is configured to be operable (vibrate) in this way, functions as a movable part for effect (also referred to as a "movable effect part") that is operably mounted on the front side (front component) of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The operating mode of the first effect button 63a is not limited to vibration, but may instead be, for example, protruding upward or rotating, or may be operable in an operating mode selected from multiple operating modes such as vibration, protruding, and rotating based on the effect pattern. The second effect button 63b may also be configured to be operable in a predetermined operating mode.

Furthermore, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment described herein, and it is sufficient that it allows the player to make an input. For example, it may be a lever-type input means (operation means), a contact-type input means (e.g., retractable type, touch sensor type, etc.) in which the player makes an input by directly touching the button portion, or a non-contact-type input means (e.g., photoelectric type, etc.) in which input is made by detecting the proximity of a part of the player's body (e.g., the palm of the hand).

A play area 3, into which game balls launched by operating the launch handle 60 flow, is formed on the game board 2 and is surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 (play area 3) can be seen from the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1 through a window (viewing window) provided in the front frame 51 (see Figure 1).

The play area 3 has multiple protruding game nails 16 that guide game balls, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is designed to prevent game balls that have been guided into the play area from returning to the launching device. The game board 2 also has decorative board lamps 5 (see Figure 5) that can emit various lights depending on the game situation.

Near the center of the game board 2 (within the game area) is provided an image display device 7 having a display screen 7a (display unit) capable of displaying various images (display objects). The image display device 7 is equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD) and is provided on the back side of the game board 2 so that the display screen 7a (display unit) can be seen from the front through an opening provided approximately in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3).

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as the "performance pattern display section") in which performance patterns 8 are displayed. Performance patterns 8 are composed of three patterns: left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R, and are displayed in a fluctuating manner in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special patterns described below, and are displayed stationary in synchronization with the stationary display of the special patterns. The fluctuating display can be displayed, for example, by scrolling up and down, left and right, diagonally, etc. Any or all of performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are also simply referred to as "performance patterns 8".

The effect symbol display area 7b consists of three symbol display areas: "left," "center," and "right." The left symbol display area displays the left effect symbol 8L, the center symbol display area displays the center effect symbol 8C, and the right symbol display area displays the right effect symbol 8R. Note that the left, center, and right symbol display areas do not need to be positioned separately; the left, center, and right symbol display areas may each be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b).

In this embodiment, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of a number pattern (identification information type, pattern type) from "1" to "9," and these number patterns are displayed in order. Specifically, the changing display of the effect pattern 8 is achieved by scrolling the effect patterns in ascending order from "1" → "2" ... "8" → "9." Once it reaches "9," it returns to "1," and the scrolling display is repeated until the change ends (stops).

In this embodiment, each of the "1" to "9" symbols that make up performance symbol 8 contains color information, allowing each symbol to be classified by color. Specifically, the odd-numbered symbols "3" and "7" are red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbols"), and the other odd-numbered symbols "1," "5," and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"). Additionally, the even-numbered symbols "2," "4," "6," and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "blue symbols").

The combination of left, center, and right effect symbols (stop display mode) displayed (stopped) in effect symbol display area 7b displays the results of the first special symbol variable display displayed on first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as the "first special symbol display unit") and the second special symbol variable display displayed on second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"), i.e., the results of the special symbol win/loss judgment (also simply referred to as the "win/loss judgment"), in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. In this embodiment, the order in which the three variable display effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped (stop order) is, in principle, "left → right → center." In other words, the first stop symbol in the stop order is the left effect symbol 8L, the second stop symbol in the stop order is the right effect symbol 8R, and the third (last) stop symbol in the stop order is the center effect symbol 8C. The first stop symbol in the stopping order is also called the "first stop symbol," the second stop symbol in the stopping order is also called the "second stop symbol," and the third stop symbol in the stopping order is also called the "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol."

Here, special patterns are also referred to as "special patterns" or "special identification information," performance patterns are also referred to as "performance identification information," and either or both of the special patterns and performance patterns are also referred to as "pattern" or "identification information," the first special pattern is also referred to as "special pattern 1," "first special pattern," "first special identification information," or "first identification information," the second special pattern is also referred to as "special pattern 2," "second special pattern," "second special identification information," or "second identification information," and the normal pattern is also referred to as "normal pattern" or "normal identification information."

Furthermore, at least one of the first special symbol display device 41a (described below) that displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol display device 41b (described below) that displays the second special symbol, and the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) (described below) that controls the display of the special symbols, is also referred to as the "special identification information display means," and at least one of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) that displays the effect symbol 8, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) and image control unit 100 (image control microcomputer 101) (described below) that control the display of the effect symbol 8, is also referred to as the "effect identification information display means." Furthermore, at least one of the image display device 7, the first special symbol display device 41a, and the second special symbol display device 41b is also referred to as the "identification information display means" or "symbol display means," or simply as the "display means."

The display mode of the effect symbol 8 can be determined as follows. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the effect symbol 8 can be displayed as a triplet of identical symbols (so-called "double numbers"), such as "222" or "777." If the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a miss, the effect symbol 8 can be displayed as a triplet of identical symbols (so-called "variable numbers"), such as "637" or "373," in which at least one symbol is different from the others. A triplet of identical symbols (double numbers) is also called a "winning symbol arrangement," and a triplet of symbols (variable numbers) in which at least one symbol is different from the others is also called a "missing symbol arrangement." There are multiple types of symbol arrangements (display modes) for both winning and missing symbol arrangements. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the effect symbol 8 can be displayed as a triplet or a non-double number depending on the type of jackpot.

By looking at the effect symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game. In other words, the player does not generally grasp the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination directly by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather by looking at the effect symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b). Such game effects using effect symbols 8 can be said to be effects (also called "notification effects") that notify the player of the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination. Game effects (notification effects) that use effect symbols 8 are also called "effect symbol game effects," and effects that cause the effect symbols 8 to change and then stop (determined) are also called "variable effects" (i.e., effect symbol game effects).

Here, among the results of the special pattern hit/miss judgment, a "jackpot" is referred to as a "specific result" or "first result," and a "miss" is referred to as a "non-specific result" or "second result." Furthermore, the display mode (stop display mode) of the special pattern corresponding to a "jackpot" result in the special pattern hit/miss judgment, and the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect pattern 8 corresponding to a "jackpot" result in the special pattern hit/miss judgment, are also referred to as a "specific mode," "specific display result," or "first display result." Furthermore, the display mode (stop display mode) of the special pattern corresponding to a "miss" result in the special pattern hit/miss judgment, and the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect pattern 8 corresponding to a "miss" result in the special pattern hit/miss judgment are also referred to as a "non-specific mode," "non-specific display result," or "second display result." Furthermore, the display of changes in special patterns and/or performance patterns that are executed based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is also called a "hit/miss fluctuation" or "specific fluctuation," and the display of changes in special patterns and/or performance patterns that are executed based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is also called a "miss fluctuation" or "non-specific fluctuation."

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying game effects (effect symbol game effects, notification effects, variable effects) using the effect symbols 8 described above, various effect displays are also displayed, such as jackpot game effects (special game effects) that are executed in conjunction with jackpot games and demo effects for waiting customers. In effect symbol game effects (variable effects), jackpot game effects, and demo effects, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, various images other than effect symbols, such as background images and character images, are also displayed.

Demo effects can also display an effect setting screen (not shown). The effect setting screen allows the player to configure settings related to the gaming machine's effects, such as the volume of the sound output from the speaker 67, the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the illumination components such as the board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, and movable lamp 15, the background display, and the conditions for executing preview effects. While waiting for customers to play the demo effect, the player can operate the effect buttons or other operating means (e.g., the control lever, cross key, rotary knob, etc.) to display the effect setting screen on the display screen 7a. By operating the effect buttons, etc. according to the contents of the effect setting screen, the player can freely configure various effect settings (so-called "customization"). Note that effect customization may also be possible during variable play or special play (i.e., during play). In this case, customization during play can be enabled by displaying the effect setting screen in a portion of the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the game (effect) currently in progress.

In addition to the effect symbol 8, the display screen 7a is provided with a determination symbol display area 7c in which a determination symbol 8s is displayed that indicates (notifies) the result of the special symbol judgment (see Figure 3). In this embodiment, the determination symbol display area 7c is provided to the upper right of the effect symbol display area 7b (the upper right part of the display screen 7a) (see Figure 3). The size of the determination symbol display area 7c is smaller than the effect symbol display area 7b, and therefore the size of the determination symbol 8s is also smaller than the effect symbol 8. The determination symbol 8s is also called the "small symbol" or "small identification information".

Like the performance symbol 8, the judgment symbol 8s is composed of three symbols: a left judgment symbol 8sL, a middle judgment symbol 8sC, and a right judgment symbol 8sR. Its variable display synchronizes with the variable display of the special symbol described below, and its stationary display synchronizes with the stationary display of the special symbol. The variable display of the judgment symbol 8s can be, for example, a scrolling display in the vertical or horizontal direction, or a rotating display in the vertical or horizontal direction. The left judgment symbol 8sL, middle judgment symbol 8sC, and right judgment symbol 8sR, or any or all of them, are also referred to simply as "judgment symbol 8s."

In the determination symbol display area 7c, the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is also displayed based on the combination (stop display mode) of the left, center, and right determination symbols 8s. In other words, the determination symbol 8s is displayed in a variable manner and stopped state based on the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment. In this embodiment, the determination symbol 8s is displayed in the same stop display mode (pattern arrangement) as the stop display mode (pattern arrangement, confirmed stop pattern) of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b. However, there is no set stopping order like with the effect symbol 8s, and the three determination symbols 8sL, 8sC, and 8sR are configured to start their variable display all at once when the special symbol hit/miss display begins, and to stop and display all at once when the special symbol hit/miss display is stopped.

The stop display mode may be different for the performance symbol 8 and the determination symbol 8s. Also, the stop display mode (winning symbol arrangement) when the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot may be the same for the performance symbol 8 and the determination symbol 8s, and the stop display mode (missing symbol arrangement) when a miss is different for the performance symbol 8 and the determination symbol 8s. If the stop display mode (missing symbol arrangement) when a miss is different for the performance symbol 8 and the determination symbol 8s, the missing symbol arrangement for the determination symbol 8s can be only one type (for example, "246"). Because players primarily look at the performance symbol 8 to understand the result of the hit/miss judgment (hit/miss), there is little need to provide multiple types of missing symbol arrangements for the determination symbol 8s, as with the performance symbol 8. Furthermore, the results of the special symbol hit/miss judgments made during gameplay (the results of variable play) are almost always misses when considering the probability of a jackpot, and by limiting the miss pattern arrangement of the judgment symbol 8s to one type, it is possible to streamline and simplify symbol display control.

The reason for displaying the determination symbol 8s (providing the determination symbol display area 7c) is that, for example, when a performance image that builds up the player's anticipation for a jackpot, such as the preview performance or super reach performance described below, is displayed across almost the entire display screen 7a during the execution of a variable performance, the performance symbol 8 may be obscured by the performance image, or the performance symbol 8 may become hidden (erased), making it impossible to see. In other words, even if the performance symbol 8 becomes invisible (not displayed), it is possible to know through the determination symbol 8s that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or that it has stopped (confirmed stopped). For this reason, the determination symbol 8 is always displayed in a game state (also called a "variable game state") in which variable play (variable display of identification information) is possible.

In this embodiment, the determination symbol 8s is not differentiated by color like the effect symbol 8, and is displayed in the same color regardless of the number (symbol type). In this embodiment, the color (display color) of the determination symbol 8s is a single color, gray, which is an intermediate color between white and black. The determination symbol 8s is a relatively inconspicuous gray (neutral color) because the determination symbol 8s does not function as a symbol that the player primarily looks at to understand the result of the special symbol judgment (i.e., a symbol that notifies the player of the result of the special symbol judgment), but rather functions as a symbol that primarily indicates the fluctuation status of the special symbol, and does not need to be made to stand out like the effect symbol 8. Furthermore, by making the color (display color) of the determination symbol 8s a single color, it is possible to improve the efficiency and simplification of symbol display control. However, like the effect symbol 8, the determination symbol 8s may also contain color information, and may be color-coded in the same way as the effect symbol 8, or a different color.

Display screen 7a is provided with a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section) that displays first effect holds 9a according to the number of stored first special symbol holds (described below), and a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) that displays second effect holds 9b according to the number of stored second special symbol holds (described below). In this embodiment, first effect hold display area 9c and second effect hold display area 9d are provided below effect symbol display area 7b (lower part of display screen 7a) (see Figure 3). Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold and second effect hold, the number of stored first special symbol holds displayed on first special symbol hold display 43a (described below) and the number of stored second special symbol holds displayed on second special symbol hold display 43b can be clearly shown to the player.

Here, the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c is also referred to as the "first hold icon" or "first memory display," the second effect hold 9b displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d is also referred to as the "second hold icon" or "second memory display," and either or both of the first effect hold 9a and the second effect hold 9b are also referred to as the "hold icon" or "memory display." Also, the first effect hold display area 9c is also referred to as the "first hold icon display unit," "first memory display unit," or "first memory display means," the second effect hold display area 9d is also referred to as the "second hold icon display unit," "second memory display unit," or "second memory display means," and either or both of the first effect hold display area 9c and the second effect hold display area 9d are also referred to as the "hold icon display unit," "memory display unit," or "memory display means."

Also, as shown in Figure 3, the display screen 7a has a variable hold display area 9e that displays the effect hold corresponding to the currently variable special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), i.e., the effect hold corresponding to the consumed special symbol hold (first effect hold 9a or second effect hold 9b) (see Figure 3). In this embodiment, the variable hold display area 9e is provided to the left of the first effect hold display area 9c and the second effect hold display area 9d.

The first effect holds 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c correspond to the special symbol 1 reserved ball numbers "1," "2," "3," and "4," in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9c, and the second effect holds 9b displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d correspond to the special symbol 2 reserved ball numbers "1," "2," "3," and "4," in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9d. Therefore, as the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number "1" begins (the first special symbol hold is consumed), the first effect hold 9a corresponding to that hold (the first effect hold 9a displayed at the left end of the first effect hold display area 9c) moves (is displayed as moving) from the first effect hold display area 9c to the variable hold display area 9e. Additionally, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls "1" for special symbol 2 begins (when the second special symbol reserve is consumed), the second effect reserve 9b corresponding to that reserve (the second effect reserve 9b displayed on the left edge of the second effect reserve display area 9d) moves (is moved and displayed) from the second effect reserve display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e. The number of reserved balls is also simply referred to as the "number of reserved balls." Note that when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is "0" and a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 20 or second start hole 21) and the variable display of the special symbol begins, the effect reserve (first effect reserve 9a or second effect reserve 9b) is displayed in the variable hold display area 9e in response to the start ball entering, which triggers the start of the variable display (variable game).

Here, the variable hold display area 9e can also be referred to as a "hold icon display section," "memory display section," or "memory display means," and the effect hold displayed in the variable hold display area 9e can also be referred to as a "hold icon" or "memory display." The effect hold displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is also referred to as a "variable memory display," "variable hold icon," or "active hold icon," and the effect hold (hold icon) displayed in the effect hold display areas 9c and 9d and the effect hold (active hold icon) displayed in the variable hold display area 9e are collectively referred to as a "memory display" or "hold icon." Either or both of the effect hold display areas 9c and 9d and the variable hold display area 9e, which can display effect holds 9a and 9b, are also referred to as a "effect hold display area," "effect hold display section," or "effect hold display means."

As described above, the display screen 7a (image display device 7), which can display various effect displays and effect images (also referred to as "display objects"), is also referred to as the "effect display unit" or "effect display means," or simply as the "display unit." Furthermore, effects (effects performed on the display screen) that are produced by displaying on the display screen 7a, such as game effects using effect symbols 8 (effect symbol game effects, notification effects, variable effects), jackpot game effects, demo effects, and preview effects described below, are also referred to as "display effects."

A center ornament 10 (so-called "center gadget") is provided near the center of the gaming board 2 (gaming area 3) in front of the image display device 7 (display means) and surrounds the display screen 7a. The center ornament 10 is made of a molded plastic (resin) part and is attached to the surface (front) of the gaming board 2 as a frame-shaped part (board part) with an opening in the center. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is visible through the central opening of the center ornament 10.

A stage section 11 is provided at the bottom of the center decorative body 10, and has a game ball rolling surface along which game balls can roll. A hollow warp section 12 is provided at the left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and guides game balls flowing down the game area 3 (left game area 3A) toward the stage section 11 by receiving them through the warp entrance and discharging them through the warp exit. Game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage section 11 have a higher chance of entering the first starting hole 20 (described below) than game balls not guided to the stage section 11. In addition, a decorative member 13 shaped like letters or figures is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10, and has an electric lighting element (board lamp 5) such as an LED that can light up or flash depending on the game status.

A movable effect member 14 (also referred to as a "movable body") that can be operated in a predetermined manner is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10, to the left of the decorative member 13. In this embodiment, the movable effect member 14 (movable body) is a circular movable body with a sawtooth outer periphery, as shown in Figure 3, and is arranged so that it is always visible to the player. Normally (when not in operation), the movable effect member 14 is located in a standby position (initial position) on the upper left side (top left) of the center decorative body 10, so that it does not cover the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see Figure 66 (A)).

When the conditions for moving the movable effect member 14 from the standby position to the activation position (also referred to as "activation conditions") are met, the movable effect member 14 begins activation and moves from the standby position toward the predetermined activation position. Specifically, the movable effect member 14 moves diagonally downward to the right from the standby position and stops at a position (activation position) that covers approximately the center of the display screen 7a (see Figure 66 (B)). When the movable effect member 14 is in the activation position, it is located in front of the display screen 7a and covers a portion of the display screen 7a (in this embodiment, a portion of the effect symbol display area 7b). From this state, when the conditions for moving the movable effect member 14 from the activation position to the standby position (also referred to as "return conditions") are met, the movable effect member 14 begins activation and moves from the activation position toward the standby position. Specifically, the movable effect member 14 moves diagonally upward to the left from the activation position and stops at the standby position in the upper left of the display screen 7a (see Figure 66 (A)). In this way, the movable performance member 14 can move (operate) (be displaceable) between the standby position and the operating position.

The movable effect member 14 (movable body) is provided with a movable body lamp 15 (also called "movable body illumination") consisting of multiple LEDs, and the movable body lamp 15 can emit light together with or separately from the movable effect. In other words, the movable effect member 14 in this embodiment is configured to include the movable body lamp 15. Furthermore, when the movable effect member 14 is moved to the operating position (in front of the display screen 7a), it can rotate around an axis (not shown) perpendicular to the display screen 7a (see Figure 66 (B)).

In this embodiment, the effect of activating the movable effect member 14 (also referred to as the "moving effect") can be performed as a preview effect during the changing display of the effect symbol 8, or as part of a reach effect. Executing such a moving effect can heighten (increase) the player's anticipation for a jackpot. Furthermore, when the conditions for ending the moving effect are met, the movable effect member 14 moves (returns) to its original standby position.

Here, the movable performance member 14 corresponds to a so-called "gimmick," and the performance (moving performance) that activates the movable performance member 14 corresponds to a "gimmick performance." The movable performance member 14 (movable body) is also referred to as a "moving part" or "moving performance means." In other words, the movable performance member 14 functions as a moving part (moving performance part) for the performance.

In this embodiment, one movable effect member 14 is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10, but the location of the movable effect member and the number of movable effect members are not limited to this. For example, a movable effect member may be provided on either or both of the left and right sides of the central opening (display screen 7a) of the center decorative body 10, or a movable effect member may be provided below (on the stage section 11 side) the central opening (display screen 7a) of the center decorative body 10. A movable effect member may also be provided on the front frame 51. In this case, two patterns can be provided: one in which a movable effect is executed by activating the movable effect member on the game board side (also referred to as a "board-side movable effect" or "first movable effect"), and one in which a movable effect is executed by activating the movable effect member on the frame side (also referred to as a "frame-side movable effect" or "second movable effect"). The movable effect member on the game board side is also referred to as a "board-side movable effect member" or "board-side movable body," and the movable effect member on the frame side is also referred to as a "frame-side movable effect member" or "frame-side movable body." In this way, increasing the variety of movable effects can heighten the excitement of the game. In addition to the movable effect member 14, for example, if the effect button 63 vibrates, the effect (gimmick effect) that activates the effect button 63 can also be called a "movable effect," and the effect button 63 can also be called a "movable part" or "movable effect means."

In addition, the effects of generating (outputting) various sounds (sound effects) from the speaker 67 are also referred to as sound effects, and the speaker 67 is also referred to as "sound effect means." Effects that illuminate the board surface lamps 5, frame lamps 66, decorative members 13, movable body lamps 15, etc. are also referred to as "light-emitting effects" or "light effect," and the board surface lamps 5, frame lamps 66, decorative members 13, movable body lamps 15, etc. are also referred to as "light-emitting units" or "light-emitting effect means." In addition to the board lamps 5, for example, if the effect button 63 or launch handle 60 has built-in lighting components such as LEDs, and the lighting components light up or flash, the effects of illuminating the effect button 63 or launch handle 60 can be referred to as "light-emitting effects," and the lighting components built into the effect button 63 or launch handle 60 can be referred to as "light-emitting units" or "light-emitting effect means." "Display effect means," "movable effect means," "sound effect means," and "light-emitting effect means" are collectively referred to as "effect means."

Below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 (below the stage section 11) is a fixed winning device 19 equipped with a non-variable first starting hole 20 (also referred to as a "non-variable starting hole" or "fixed starting hole") whose ease of entry of the gaming ball (scoring probability) does not change. Random numbers and the like for determining whether a special symbol has been won are obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20, and when a predetermined condition is met, a win/loss determination for the first special symbol (first special symbol win/loss determination) is made, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable and stationary manner based on the result of the win/loss determination.

Below the first starting hole 20 is a variable winning device 22 equipped with a variable second starting hole 21 (also called a "variable starting hole") that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter (the probability of entering). The variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) is typically provided as an electric device.

A random number or the like for determining whether a special symbol has been hit is obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21, and when a predetermined condition is met, a determination of whether the second special symbol has been hit (second special symbol hit determination) is made, and based on the result of the hit determination, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and shown.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, which opens and closes the second starting hole 21 by operating the movable member 23. This opening and closing operation allows the second starting hole 21 to change between a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state. In other words, the movable member 23 changes the possibility of a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening and closing operation). The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting hole solenoid 24 (see Figure 5). In this embodiment, the second starting hole 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents game balls from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Note that the second starting hole 21 does not have to be completely ball-enterable when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as it is more difficult for game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state.

To the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, there is provided a big prize device 31 equipped with a big prize hole 30 (also called a "special prize hole" or "variable prize hole"). This big prize device 31 (big prize hole 30) is provided as a special electric device.

The special prize device 31 is equipped with an opening/closing member 32, and operation of the opening/closing member 32 opens and closes the special prize opening 30. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a special prize opening solenoid 33 (see Figure 5). Game balls can enter the special prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open position. In other words, the special prize device 31 can be changed between a ball-entry-disabled state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter, and a ball-entry-enabled state (open state) in which game balls can enter, by opening and closing the opening/closing member 32.

A gate 28 (passing opening) through which game balls can pass is provided in the right area of the game area 3. Random numbers and other information for determining whether a game ball has been selected are obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28, and when predetermined conditions are met, a normal symbol hit/miss determination is made to determine whether the second start opening 21 should be opened, and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner and is displayed as a still symbol based on the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination. When a winning normal symbol is displayed as a still symbol, the second start opening 21 opens.

The lower area of the gaming area 3 is provided with multiple general prize openings 27. The first start opening 20, second start opening 21, large prize opening 30, and general prize opening 27 are each openings that trigger the payout of prize balls, and when a game ball enters each opening, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out to the respective opening. For example, the number of prize balls for the first start opening 20 is "3," the number of prize balls for the second start opening 21 is "1," the number of prize balls for the large prize opening 30 is "15," and the number of prize balls for the general prize opening 27 is "10."

The game area 3, which is thus arranged with multiple ball entry ports (first start port 20, second start port 21, big prize port 30, general prize port 27, and gate 28), can be divided into a left game area 3A (first area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right game area 3B (second area) on the right side. Firing a game ball so that it flows down through the left game area 3A is also called a "left hit," and firing a game ball so that it flows down through the right game area 3B is also called a "right hit."

Of the multiple ball entry ports, the first start port 20 and the left general entry port 27 are positioned to allow game balls flowing down the left game area 3A of the game area 3 to enter, while the second start port 21, the special entry port 30, the right general entry port 27, and the gate 28 are positioned to allow game balls flowing down the right game area 3B of the game area 3 to enter. For this reason, when starting play with the pachinko game machine 1, players generally aim to have the ball enter the first start port 20 by hitting with their left hand. On the other hand, if a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the first start port 20 and the game state changes to a special game state, players generally aim to have the ball enter the gate 28, the second start port 21, and the special entry port 30 by hitting with their right hand. The number of starting gates, big prize gates, general prize gates, and gates is not limited to that in this embodiment, and any number of each can be installed, such as three starting gates, two big prize gates, four general prize gates, or two gates.

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, a main display 40 is provided outside the play area 3 (outside the play area) at the bottom right of the play board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that displays the first special symbol as it changes and stops, a second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section) that displays the second special symbol as it changes and stops, a regular symbol display 42 (regular symbol display section) that displays the regular symbol as it changes and stops, a first special symbol hold display 43a that displays the number of win/loss determination information (first special symbol hold) stored for the first special symbol, a second special symbol hold display 43b that displays the number of win/loss determination information (second special symbol hold) stored for the second special symbol, and a regular symbol display 43b. The main display 40 includes a normal symbol hold indicator 44 that displays the number of memories with symbol display 42 pending activation (normal symbol hold), a round indicator 45 that shows the number of rounds of jackpot play that will be executed if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss/miss or second special symbol hit/miss/miss determination is a jackpot, a game status indicator 46 that indicates whether the probability fluctuation function is activated, a launch direction indicator 47 that shows the direction in which the game ball will be launched (whether it should be hit left or right), and a win indicator 48 that indicates whether the result of the first special symbol hit/miss/miss or second special symbol hit/miss/miss determination is a win (see Figure 4). The display of these various indicators included in the main display 40 is controlled by the main control unit 80, which will be described later.

The first special pattern and second special pattern may be collectively referred to as the special patterns, the first special pattern display 41a and the second special pattern display 41b may be collectively referred to as the "special pattern display" or "special pattern display unit", and the first special pattern reserve display 43a and the second special pattern reserve display 43b may be collectively referred to as the "special pattern reserve display" or "special pattern reserve display unit".

The special symbol display unit displays a variable special symbol (identification information) for a predetermined period of time, then stops and displays it, and the stopped and displayed special symbol (stop symbol) announces the result of the lottery (special symbol hit/miss determination, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is based on the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and the variable display of the second special symbol is based on the game ball entering the second start hole 21. The stopped and displayed special symbol (stop symbol) is one stop symbol selected from multiple types of stop symbols depending on the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination. If the stopped symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (specific special symbol, specific identification information), that is, if the stopped display mode of the special symbol (the display result of the variable display of the special symbol) is a specific mode (specific display result) indicating a jackpot, the game will transition to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which a jackpot game (special game) can be played in which the jackpot opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that has stopped and been displayed. The opening patterns of the jackpot opening in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol remains stationary until a specified stationary display time (determined display time) has elapsed. If the displayed special symbol is a losing symbol (missing pattern, non-specific pattern) and a reserved special symbol is stored at the time of the stationary display, the oldest (earliest) reserved special symbol in the stored order will be consumed once the stationary display time has elapsed, thereby initiating the variable display of the next special symbol. Furthermore, if the displayed special symbol is a losing symbol and no reserved special symbol is stored at the time of the stationary display, the displayed special symbol will remain stationary even after the stationary display time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the displayed special symbol is a jackpot symbol, once the stationary display time has elapsed, the game will transition to the opening period of the jackpot game, which will be described later, and the first round of the jackpot game will begin after the opening period has elapsed.

The stop display time for special symbols is generally between 0.5 and 1.0 seconds, and in this embodiment it is set to 0.6 seconds. The stop display time when the stopped special symbol is a losing symbol (non-specific mode) (missing stop display time) may be different from the stop display time when the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol (specific mode) (jackpot stop display time). In this case, the jackpot stop display time can be made longer than the losing stop display time, and the losing stop display time can be made longer than the jackpot stop display time. The stop display time may also be different depending on the game state, such as a low base state or a high base state, as described below. The losing stop display time is also called the "non-specific stop display time," and the jackpot stop display time is also called the "specific stop display time."

As shown in Figure 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs designated "i-p" and displays special symbols corresponding to the results of the first special symbol hit/miss determination. In this embodiment, seven types of jackpots are provided as results of the first special symbol hit/miss determination: "10R 1st Jackpot," "10R 2nd Jackpot," "10R 3rd Jackpot," "10R 4th Jackpot," "10R 5th Jackpot," "5R 6th Jackpot," and "5R 7th Jackpot" (see Figures 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the first special symbol display 41a are capable of displaying display modes (specific modes, specific display results) corresponding to each of these seven types of jackpots. For example, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination is a 10R first jackpot, two "ij" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R first jackpot symbol); if the result is a 10R second jackpot, two "in" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R second jackpot symbol); if the result is a 10R third jackpot, two "im" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R third jackpot symbol), etc., various jackpot symbols (specific modes, specific display results) are displayed by combining the lighting and extinguishing of the multiple LEDs that make up the first special symbol display 41a. Also, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination is a miss, one "p" LED is lit and the rest are turned off (miss symbol).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a-h," and displays special symbols according to the results of the second special symbol hit/miss determination. In this embodiment, two types of jackpots are provided as results of the second special symbol hit/miss determination: "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot" (see Figures 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the second special symbol display 41b are capable of adopting display modes (specific modes, specific display results) according to each of these two types of jackpots. For example, if the result of the second special symbol hit/miss determination is a 10R 8th jackpot, the three "abd" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R 8th jackpot symbol), and if the result is a 10R 9th jackpot, the three "abg" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R 9th jackpot symbol). Various jackpot symbols (specific modes, specific display results) are displayed by combining the lighting and extinguishing of the multiple LEDs that make up the second special symbol display 41b. Furthermore, if the result is a miss, one "h" LED is lit and the rest are turned off (miss symbol).

Note that the display mode of the special symbols (symbols) and the type of jackpot (number of rounds, number of jackpots, etc.) are not limited to these and can be set arbitrarily.

Before the special symbol is displayed statically, the special symbol is displayed dynamically for a predetermined period of time. The special symbol's variable display can be, for example, a display in which each LED lights up so that light flows repeatedly in a predetermined order, such as clockwise or counterclockwise. Furthermore, the first special symbol displayed statically on the first special symbol display 41a remains static until the aforementioned static display time has elapsed, at which point the next variable display begins. Similarly, the second special symbol displayed statically on the second special symbol display 41b remains static until the aforementioned static display time has elapsed, at which point the next variable display begins. If the next variable display does not begin, the static display mode is maintained even after the static display time has elapsed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various information (also referred to as "acquired information"), such as a random number used to determine whether a special symbol has been drawn, is acquired based on the ball (acquisition means), and the acquired information can be stored as a special symbol reserve (also referred to as "reserved information") in a special symbol reserve memory unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80 (reserved memory means). Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting hole 20, it is stored as a first special symbol reserve (also referred to as "first reserved information") in the first special symbol reserve memory unit (not shown), and if the ball enters the second starting hole 21, it is stored as a second special symbol reserve (also referred to as "second reserved information") in the second special symbol reserve memory unit (not shown). There is an upper limit set for the number of special symbol reserves (acquired information) that can be stored in each special symbol reserve memory unit, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to "4."

Here, the "special chart reserve memory unit" is also referred to as the "acquired information memory means" or "reserved memory means," the first special chart reserve memory unit is also referred to as the "first acquired information memory means" or "first reserved memory means," and the second special chart reserve memory unit is also referred to as the "second acquired information memory means" or "second reserved memory means." Furthermore, either or both of the first special chart reserve memory unit and the second special chart reserve memory unit are also referred to as the "special chart reserve memory unit," "acquired information memory means," or "reserved memory means," or simply as "memory means."

Special symbol reserves stored in the special symbol reserve memory unit are consumed when the display of special symbol variations based on those reserved symbols begins (executes). In other words, consuming a reserved special symbol means determining the random number or other value used to determine whether the special symbol corresponding to that reserved symbol is a hit, and then executing the display of special symbol variations to show the results of that determination. Therefore, in pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the display of special symbols based on a game ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 cannot be executed immediately upon the ball entering, i.e., even if the display of special symbols is currently being executed or a special game is being played, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether the ball is a hit or a miss, up to a specified number ("4" in this embodiment).

The number of reserved special drawings stored in the reserved special drawing memory unit is displayed on the first reserved special drawing display 43a and the second reserved special drawing display 43b. Specifically, the first reserved special drawing display 43a is composed of two LEDs, "uv," and displays the number of reserved first special drawings by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of reserved first special drawings. For example, if the number of pending items is "0", the display may show "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green) with both LEDs turned off; if the number of pending items is "1", the display may show "u□v●" with the "u" LED turned off and the "v" LED turned on in red; if the number of pending items is "2", the display may show "u●v□" with the "u" LED turned on in red and the "v" LED turned off; if the number of pending items is "3", the display may show "u●v●" with both LEDs turned on in red; and if the number of pending items is "4 (maximum number)", the display may show "u▲v▲" with both LEDs turned on in green.

The second special chart reserve indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs, "wx," and displays the number of second special chart reserves by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special chart reserves. For example, when the reserve number is "0," the display mode is "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), with both LEDs turned off, and the reserve numbers "1" to "4" are determined in the same way as the first special chart reserve indicator 43a.

In addition, similar to the first effect hold display area 9c and second effect hold display area 9d described above, the first special chart hold display device 43a can be referred to as the "first memory display unit" or "first memory display means," the second special chart hold display device 43b can be referred to as the "second memory display unit" or "second memory display means," and either or both of the first special chart hold display device 43a and the second special chart hold display device 43b can be referred to as the "memory display unit" or "memory display means."

The normal symbol display is triggered by the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then displays it in a static state. The statically displayed normal symbol (stopped symbol) notifies the user of the result of the normal symbol win/loss judgment based on the passage of the gaming ball through gate 28. The statically displayed normal symbol is one normal symbol selected from multiple types of normal symbols by the normal symbol win/loss judgment. If the statically displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (winning normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two "st" LEDs, and the lighting state of these LEDs allows it to display a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol win/loss judgment. For example, if the judgment result is a win, a winning normal symbol is displayed as a static display with both LEDs lit, such as "s■t■" (e.g., ■: lit, □: off). If the judgment result is a miss, a losing normal symbol (non-specific normal symbol) is displayed as "s□t■" with only the "t" LED lit. Before the normal symbol is displayed as a static display, the normal symbol is displayed as a variable display for a predetermined period of time. The variable display state is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately light up and go out. Furthermore, the normal symbol displayed as a static display on the normal symbol display 42 remains in that static display state until the static display time has elapsed, at which point the next variable display begins. If the next variable display does not begin, the static display state is maintained even after the static display time has elapsed.

In pachinko gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit or miss is acquired based on that passage, and the acquired information can be stored as a normal symbol hold (hold information) in a normal symbol hold memory unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of main control unit 80. An upper limit is set on the number of normal symbol holds that can be stored in the normal symbol hold memory unit, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is "4". A normal symbol hold stored in the normal symbol hold memory unit is consumed when it becomes possible to display a variable normal symbol based on that normal symbol hold. Consumption of a normal symbol hold means determining the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit or miss that corresponds to that normal symbol hold, and executing a variable normal symbol display to show the result of that determination. Therefore, in pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, i.e., even if the variable display of normal symbols is being executed or an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to determine whether the normal symbols are correct or incorrect for that passage can be reserved up to a specified number.

The number of reserved general maps stored in the reserved general map memory unit is displayed on the reserved general map display 44. Specifically, the reserved general map display 44 is composed of two LEDs, "qr," and displays the number of reserved general maps by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of reserved general maps. For example, if the reserved number is "0," the display mode is "q□r□" (e.g., □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), with both LEDs off; if the reserved number is "1," the display mode is "q□r●," with the "q" LED off and the "r" LED lit in red. Furthermore, reserved numbers "2" to "4" are determined in the same way as the first special map reserve display 43a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs: a 5R lamp and a 10R lamp. On the round display 45, when a 5R jackpot occurs, for example, the 5R lamp lights up at the same time that the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is something like "5▲10R△" (for example, △: off, ▲: on). Also, when a 10R jackpot occurs, the 10R lamp lights up at the same time that the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is something like "5△10R▲" (for example, △: off, ▲: on).

[Electrical configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
2 and 5, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control board (also referred to as a "main control unit" or "game control unit") 80 that controls the progress of the game and game profits, such as determining whether a special symbol has been won or not, determining whether a normal symbol has been won or not, and transitioning between game states, a sub-control board (also referred to as a "sub-control unit" or "performance control unit") 90 that controls the presentation executed as the game progresses, an image control board (also referred to as an "image control unit") 100 that controls the display of the image display device 7, an audio control board 106 that controls the output of sound effects from the speaker 67, a lamp control board 107 that controls the drive of the board lamps 5 and frame lamps 66, and a payout control board (also referred to as a "payout control unit") 110 that controls the payout of game balls.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing the main control board 80 is located approximately in the center of the rear (backside) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an image control board storage case housing the audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and image control board 100 is located above the main control board case, and a sub-control board storage case housing the sub-control board 90 is located above the image control board storage case. Furthermore, a payout control board case housing the payout control board 110 is located below and to the left of the main control board case, and a power supply board case housing the power supply board 109 is located to the right of the payout control board case. The power supply board 109 supplies the power required to drive (operate) the various boards included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the various electrical components connected to the boards (power supply means).

As shown in Figure 5, the main control board 80 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (also called a "game control microcomputer") 81, which controls the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of play, a RAM used as work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data (information) to and from other boards, etc. via the input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may also be external. The ROM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) stores various data necessary to control the progress of the game, such as tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to the progress of the game, fluctuation patterns for special and normal symbols, and opening patterns for the second starting gate 21 and the large winning gate 30. The fluctuation pattern specifies the time required from the start to the end of the fluctuation display (fluctuation time) and the content of the effects (fluctuation effects) to be executed in accordance with the fluctuation time.

The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the aforementioned special symbol reserve memory section (first special symbol reserve memory section and second special symbol reserve memory section) and regular symbol reserve memory section. In addition, memory areas are reserved at specified addresses in the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) for use with various flags and various counting counters.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the following sensors are connected that can detect game balls: a first start gate sensor 20a, a second start gate sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a special prize gate sensor 30a, and a general prize gate sensor 27a.

The first start opening sensor 20a is provided in the first start opening 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided in the second start opening 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The special prize opening sensor 30a is provided in the special prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the special prize opening 30. The general prize opening sensor 27a is provided in each general prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have entered the general prize opening 27. Sensors that can detect these game balls are also called "ball detection sensors" or "game ball detection means."

The solenoids connected include a second start port solenoid 24 and a large prize port solenoid 33. The second start port solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22. The large prize port solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the large prize device 31.

In addition to the ball detection sensor, the sensors connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88 include a radio wave sensor 71 that can detect radio waves output from a radio wave output device, and a magnetic sensor 72 that can detect magnetic fields emitted from a magnet.

The radio wave sensor 71 detects radio waves when they are output from a radio wave output device on the front side of the gaming board 2, for example. This radio wave sensor 71 is primarily installed to detect fraudulent activity (so-called "radio wave cheating") that causes the ball detection sensor to falsely detect a signal using radio waves (illegible radio waves). One or more radio wave sensors 71 are installed depending on the number and location of ball entry ports (ball detection sensors) that are the target of radio wave cheating countermeasures, the radio wave detection range (detection performance), etc. Specifically, for example, a radio wave sensor 71 can be installed targeting the first entry port 20 (first entry port sensor 20a) or second entry port 21 (second entry port sensor 21a), which triggers the execution of the special symbol win/loss determination.

The detection signal (also referred to as the "radio wave detection signal" or "radio wave sensor signal") of the radio wave sensor 71 input to the main control board 80 is OFF (non-detection state) when the radio wave sensor 71 is not detecting radio waves (unauthorized radio waves), and is ON (detection state) when the radio wave sensor 71 detects radio waves (unauthorized radio waves).

The magnetic sensor 72 detects the magnetism of a magnet when it is brought close to the surface of the window (viewing window) of the front frame 51, for example. This magnetic sensor 72 is primarily installed to detect fraudulent behavior (so-called "magnet goofing") in which a magnet is used to forcibly guide a gaming ball into a starting hole, a general winning hole, a specific area (V area), etc. One or more magnetic sensors 72 are installed depending on the number and position of the ball entry holes (ball detection sensors) that are the target of magnetic goofing countermeasures, the magnetic detection range (detection performance), etc. Specifically, for example, a magnetic sensor 72 can be installed for the first starting hole 20, which triggers the execution of the special symbol win/loss determination, or the general winning hole 27, which triggers the payout of prize balls.

The detection signal of the magnetic sensor 72 (also referred to as the "magnetic detection signal" or "magnetic sensor signal") input to the main control board 80 is OFF (non-detection state) when the magnetic sensor 72 is not detecting magnetism, and is ON (detection state) when the magnetic sensor 72 detects magnetism.

Radio wave sensors 71 and magnetic sensors 72, which can detect fraudulent behavior such as radio wave and magnetic interference, are also referred to as "fraud detection sensors" or "fraud detection means." It is also possible to provide a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations applied to the gaming machine as a fraud detection sensor (fraud detection means). The vibration sensor is primarily provided to detect fraudulent behavior (so-called "banging") in which the gaming machine is struck to apply vibrations (impacts) to the gaming board (gaming area) and direct the gaming ball toward a specific area (V area) that triggers the awarding of a gaming bonus, or a lottery area (e.g., a starting hole) that triggers the execution of a lottery for awarding a gaming bonus, as the gaming ball flows down the area. Examples of gaming bonuses include transitioning to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state or a probability variation gaming state.

Also connected to the main control board 80 are a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserve display 43a, a second special symbol reserve display 43b, a normal symbol reserve display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a launch direction display 47, and a win display 48. The display of these main displays 40 is controlled by a game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and loan balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling ball lending based on information stored on an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like), as well as to a launching device 112 via a launch control board (also referred to as the "launch control unit") 111. The launching device 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see Figure 1).

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (also called a "payout control microcomputer") 116, which controls the payout of game balls according to a predetermined program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 to pay out prize balls and loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81 and signals from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. Payout balls are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the launch handle 60 of the launching device 112 is operated, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the launching handle 60 by the operator (player), and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launching handle 60. The launching motor 113 is then driven and controlled so that game balls are fired with a strength (firing intensity) corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be continuously fired by the launching motor 113 is approximately 100 per minute.

A frame open detection switch 70 capable of detecting when the front frame 51 is open is connected to the payout control board 110. The frame open detection switch 70 is also referred to as the "open detection means." The frame open detection switch 70 is provided, for example, on the front frame 51 or the main frame 52, and is configured to switch on and off in response to a state change when the front frame 51 changes from a closed state (closed state) to an open state (open state), or from an open state to a closed state. In other words, the frame open detection switch 70 is also an open/close detection switch that detects the opening and closing of the front frame 51. The open/close detection switch is also referred to as the "open/close detection means." The front frame 51 is opened and closed by operation (external operation) by an amusement hall staff member or the like, for example, when performing maintenance work on the game board 2 or clearing ball jams (so-called "grapes") in the game area 3.

The detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 (also referred to as the "frame open detection signal") input to the dispensing control board 110 is OFF (non-detection state) when the front frame 51 is in a closed state, and ON (detection state) when the front frame 51 is in an open state. In other words, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the opening of the front frame 51 (a change in the front frame 51 from a closed state to an open state), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 turns ON. Furthermore, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the closing of the front frame 51 (a change in the front frame 51 from an open state to a closed state), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 turns OFF.

The frame open detection signal input to the payout control board 110 is input to the main control board 80. In other words, the detection signal from the frame open detection switch 70 is input to the main control board 80 via the payout control board 110. The game control microcomputer 81 is able to detect the state (open or closed) of the front frame 51 based on the state of the input frame open detection signal. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 is able to detect radio wave cheating and magnetic cheating based on the state of the aforementioned radio wave detection signal and magnetic detection signal input to the main control board 80.

If the front frame 51 opens or fraudulent activity occurs, it becomes difficult (impossible) to play normally, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes unsuitable for play. The occurrence of such an unsuitable state for play (in this embodiment, a state in which the front frame 51 is open or a state in which fraudulent activity has occurred) can be detected based on the state of the frame open detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and magnetic detection signal.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting communication direction.

As shown in Figure 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (also called the "effect control microcomputer") 91, which controls the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the effects that occur as the game progresses, a RAM used as work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The presentation control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the presentation control microcomputer 91, and the ROM may be external. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 (presentation control microcomputer 91) stores various data necessary for controlling presentations, such as tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to game presentations, and presentation patterns such as variable presentations and preview presentations. In addition, memory areas are reserved at specified addresses in the RAM (presentation control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (presentation control microcomputer 91) for use with various flags and various counting counters.

The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, etc. The sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) cooperates with the image control board 100, audio control board 106, and lamp control board 107 depending on the game situation, causing the corresponding effect devices, components, etc. (effect means) to execute various effects such as display effects, sound effects, and lamp effects (light-emitting effects). This sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) functions as effect execution means (also referred to as "effect control means") that can execute various effects depending on the game situation. Note that at least one of the image control board 100, audio control board 106, and lamp control board 107 can also be considered to function as effect execution means (effect control means) together with the sub-control board 90.

Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) causes the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer (also called the "image control microcomputer") 101 of the image control board 100 to control the display of the image display device 7.

The RAM of the image control board 100 is memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores various image data such as still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.), and background images. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91. It then executes display control based on the read image data. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 on the image control board 100.

The sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) outputs various sounds from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The sounds output from the speaker 67 can be composed of music (BGM), voice, electronic sounds, etc., and the sound data (sound data) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment, the sounds that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (sounds that can be output from the speaker 67) include effect sounds (sound effects), notification sounds, and confirmation sounds.

Examples of the effect sounds include normal fluctuation background music (normal fluctuation sound) output in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 (fluctuation effect), reach background music (reach effect sound) output in conjunction with a reach effect, a pattern stop sound output in conjunction with the stop display of the effect symbol 8 (temporary stop and/or confirmed stop), a warning sound output in conjunction with a warning effect, a winning sound output in conjunction with a game ball entering a specific winning slot such as the start slot, general winning slot, or large winning slot, and jackpot background music (jackpot effect sound) output in conjunction with a jackpot game effect.

The notification sounds include, for example, a frame open sound that notifies that the frame open detection switch 70 has detected the opening of the front frame 51 (i.e., that the front frame 51 is open), a radio wave detection sound that notifies that the radio wave sensor 71 has detected radio waves, a magnetic detection sound that notifies that the magnetic sensor 72 has detected magnetism, a left-hit instruction sound that instructs the player to hit to the left, and a lower tray full sound that notifies that the lower tray 62 is full.

The confirmation sound may be, for example, a volume confirmation sound that indicates (notifies) the player of the volume (volume setting) after setting (adjusting) the volume using a specified volume adjustment operation, or a light intensity confirmation sound that indicates (notifies) the player of the light intensity (light intensity setting) after setting (adjusting) the light intensity based on a specified light intensity adjustment operation.

A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, in which case audio control may be performed by the CPU. In this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, in which case audio data may be stored in the ROM. A speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and audio control may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101. In this case, audio data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) determines, from data stored in ROM, light pattern data (data that determines on/off status, light color, etc., and is also called "lamp data") that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66, panel lamp 5, and movable body lamp 15, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66, panel lamp 5, and movable body lamp 15 via the lamp control board 107.

The sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) operates the movable performance member 14 (movable body) connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The movable performance member 14 is operated by an electrical drive source (also referred to as "drive means") such as a motor (not shown). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines (selects) data (also referred to as "drive data") for operating the movable performance member 14 in a predetermined operating mode from multiple operation pattern data pre-stored (memorized) in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and controls the operation of the movable performance member 14 (movable performance) based on the determined operation pattern data. The movable performance device includes the movable performance member 14 and the drive means for operating it.

A CPU may be implemented on the lamp control board 107, in which case the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable performance member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be implemented on the lamp control board 107, and data related to the lighting patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

A position detection sensor 17 capable of detecting the position of the movable effect member 14 is connected to the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment, the position detection sensors 17 include a standby position detection sensor 17a (also referred to as the "first position detection sensor" or "first position detection means") that is in a detecting state (e.g., "ON") when the movable effect member 14 is in the standby position (initial position) and in a non-detecting state (e.g., "OFF") when the movable effect member 14 is not in the standby position, and an actuation position detection sensor 17b (also referred to as the "second position detection sensor" or "second position detection means") that is in a detecting state (e.g., "ON") when the movable effect member 14 is in the actuation position and in a non-detecting state (e.g., "OFF") when the movable effect member 14 is not in the actuation position. The position detection sensors 17 (standby position detection sensor 17a, actuation position detection sensor 17b) are, for example, configured as photointerrupters equipped with a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element.

A signal indicating the detection state of the standby position detection sensor 17a (also referred to as the "standby position detection signal") and a signal indicating the detection state of the operating position detection sensor 17b (also referred to as the "operating position detection signal") are each input to the sub-control board 90. Based on these input signals, the performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to be able to determine whether the movable performance member 14 is in the standby position or the operating position, i.e., the position (state) of the movable performance member 14, and to detect any abnormalities in the movable performance member 14.

For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation (power is ON), the standby position detection signal may be OFF (the standby position detection sensor 17a is in a non-detecting state) when the movable effect member 14 is not in operation (when the movable effect is not being executed) or when it starts to operate (when the movable effect starts), or the operating position signal may not be ON (the operating position detection sensor 17b is in a detecting state) even though a predetermined time (for example, the time required for the movable effect member 14 to move from the standby position to the operating position) has elapsed since the conditions for moving the movable effect member 14 from the standby position to the operating position (the operating conditions of the movable effect member 14) were met, or the standby position detection signal may not be ON (the standby position detection sensor 17a is in a detecting state). If the operating status of the movable performance member 14 and the position detection signal (detection state of the position detection sensor 17) do not match, such as if the standby position detection signal remains ON (standby position detection sensor 17a is in a detection state) or if the operating position detection signal remains ON (operation position detection sensor 17b is in a detection state) even after a predetermined time (for example, the time required for the movable performance member 14 to move from the operating position to the standby position) has elapsed since the condition for moving the movable performance member 14 from the operating position to the standby position (return condition for the movable performance member 14) was met, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable performance member 14 (abnormality in the moving part).

The position detection sensor 17 (either or both of the standby position detection sensor 17a and the operating position detection sensor 17b) is also referred to as the "position detection means," the performance control microcomputer 91 capable of detecting abnormalities in the movable performance member 14 is also referred to as the "abnormality detection means," and either or both of the standby position detection signal and the operating position detection signal are also referred to as the "position detection signal."

Connected to the sub-control board 90 are a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second effect button detection switch 63d, which detect when the first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b (see Figure 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). When a player performs a specified input operation on the first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b, a signal from the corresponding effect button detection switch is input to the sub-control board 90. The first effect button detection switch 63c is also referred to as the "first operation detection means," and the second effect button detection switch 63d is also referred to as the "second operation detection means." Furthermore, either or both of the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are also referred to as the "effect button detection switch" or "operation detection means."

[Winning summary]
Next, an overview of the win of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this embodiment, the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination are a "jackpot" and a "miss." As described above, in the event of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed statically in the special symbol display section, and in the event of a "miss," a "miss symbol" is displayed statically in the special symbol display section. In other words, depending on the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination (jackpot or miss), the special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a jackpot symbol (specific mode) or a miss symbol (non-specific mode).

If the special symbol hit determination determines that a jackpot has occurred, a "special game" is executed in which the large prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type (jackpot type) of the special symbol (jackpot symbol) that has stopped and been displayed. The special game that is executed when a jackpot has occurred is also called a "jackpot game," the game state in which a special game can be played is also called a "special game state," and the game state in which a jackpot game can be played is also called a "jackpot game state."

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with multiple jackpots. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, nine types of jackpots are provided: "10R (round) 1st jackpot," "10R 2nd jackpot," "10R 3rd jackpot," "10R 4th jackpot," "10R 5th jackpot," "5R 6th jackpot," "5R 7th jackpot," "10R 8th jackpot," and "10R 9th jackpot." Of these jackpots, "10R 1st jackpot," "10R 2nd jackpot," "10R 3rd jackpot," "10R 4th jackpot," "10R 5th jackpot," "5R 6th jackpot," and "5R 7th jackpot" are jackpots related to the first special symbol, and "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot" are jackpots related to the second special symbol. The special symbol display area will stop and display jackpot symbols corresponding to these jackpot types. Note that in this specification, round may be abbreviated as "R."

The 10R 1st jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot are all jackpots with a round count of "10," the large prize slot 30 opening "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the large prize slot 30 opening for "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 10R. An opening time of "25 seconds" is also called a "long opening."

The 5R 6th jackpot and 5R 7th jackpot are both jackpots with a round count of "5," the large prize slot 30 opening "once" for each round from 1R to 5R, and the large prize slot 30 opening time of "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 5R.

The 10R second jackpot is a jackpot where the number of rounds is "10", the large prize slot 30 opens "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the large prize slot 30 opens for "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 10R.

A 10R third jackpot is a jackpot with 10 rounds, the large prize slot 30 opening once for each of the first through tenth rounds, and the large prize slot 30 opening for 25 seconds for each of the first through seventh rounds, and 0.1 seconds for each of the eighth through tenth rounds. An opening of 0.1 seconds is also called a "short opening." Among the jackpot games related to a 10R third jackpot (also called "10R third jackpot games"), the opening time of the large prize slot 30 per round from the eighth through tenth rounds is an extremely short 0.1 second, making the chances of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 extremely low (virtually zero). For this reason, in a 10R third jackpot game, the likelihood of a game ball entering the large prize opening 30 increases in rounds 1 through 7, where the opening time per round is 25 seconds, making it easier to get the game ball to enter the large prize opening 30. Therefore, a 10R third jackpot is essentially a "7R jackpot," and a 10R third jackpot game is essentially a "7R jackpot game."

A 10R fourth jackpot is a jackpot with 10 rounds, the large prize slot 30 opening once for each of the first through tenth rounds, and the large prize slot 30 opening for 25 seconds for each of the first through fifth rounds and 0.1 seconds for each of the sixth through tenth rounds. In the jackpot game related to a 10R fourth jackpot (also referred to as a "10R fourth jackpot game"), the large prize slot 30 opens for an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds per round from the sixth through tenth rounds, making the likelihood of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 extremely low (virtually zero). Therefore, in a 10R fourth jackpot game, the likelihood of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 increases in the first through fifth rounds, where the opening time per round is 25 seconds, making it easier to enter the game ball. Therefore, a 10R fourth jackpot is essentially a "5R jackpot," and a 10R fourth jackpot game is essentially a "5R jackpot game."

A 10R fifth jackpot is a jackpot with 10 rounds, the number of times the large prize slot 30 opens is "1" for each of the first through tenth rounds, and the opening time of the large prize slot 30 is "25 seconds" for each of the first through third rounds and "0.1 seconds" for each of the fourth through tenth rounds. In the jackpot game related to the 10R fifth jackpot (also referred to as the "10R fifth jackpot game"), the opening time of the large prize slot 30 per round is an extremely short "0.1 second" from rounds four through ten, making the likelihood of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 extremely low (virtually zero). Therefore, in the 10R fourth jackpot game, the likelihood of a game ball entering the large prize slot 30 is high in rounds one through three, where the opening time per round is "25 seconds," making it easier to enter the game ball into the large prize slot 30. Therefore, a 10R fifth jackpot is essentially a "3R jackpot," and a 10R fifth jackpot game is essentially a "3R jackpot game."

Of these nine types of jackpots, the 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot have a fixed interval time (for example, approximately 0.5 to 1 second) set between each round (between rounds), and each round from the first to the final round is consumed with the same (fixed) interval time in between. The 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpots, which consume rounds in this way, can be said to be standard jackpots.

In contrast, for the 10R second jackpot and 10R third jackpot (effectively a 7R jackpot), the interval time between rounds when rounds 3, 5, and 7 are completed is different from the interval time between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed, with the former interval time being longer than the latter. For example, the interval time between rounds when rounds 3, 5, and 7 are completed is "approximately 3 to 5 seconds," while the interval time between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed is "approximately 0.5 to 1 second."

For a 10R fourth jackpot (effectively a 5R jackpot), the interval time between rounds when rounds 3 and 5 are completed is different from the interval time between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed, with the former interval time being longer than the latter. For example, the interval time between rounds when rounds 3 and 5 are completed is "approximately 3 to 5 seconds," while the interval time between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed (also called the "second interval time") is "approximately 0.5 to 1 second."

For the 10R fifth jackpot (effectively a 3R jackpot), the interval time between rounds when 3 rounds are completed is different from the interval time between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed, with the former interval time being longer than the latter. For example, the interval time between rounds when 3 rounds are completed is "approximately 3 to 5 seconds," while the interval time between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed is "approximately 0.5 to 1 second."

For the second to fifth jackpots in 10R, the relatively long interval time (e.g., approximately 3 to 5 seconds) is also referred to as the "first interval time," and the relatively short interval time (e.g., approximately 0.5 to 1 second) is also referred to as the "second interval time."

During the interval between rounds (also referred to as the "interval period") when the first interval time is set, an effect is executed using the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) or the like, indicating whether the large prize slot 30 will be long-opened in the next round as well, i.e., whether a long-open round will be executed (continued). The interval between rounds when the first interval time is set is also referred to as the "round branching timing," and the effect executed at the round branching timing is also referred to as the "round branching effect."

For example, between rounds (round branching timing) when the third round of a 10R fifth jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed suggesting that the long opening round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round end effect or a jackpot end effect), and between rounds (round branching timing) when the third round of a 10R second to fourth jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed suggesting that the long opening round will be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round continuation effect).

In addition, between rounds (round branching timing) when the fifth round of the 10R fourth jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round end effect or a jackpot end effect), and between rounds (round branching timing) when the fifth round of the 10R second and third jackpot games ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round continuation effect).

In addition, between rounds (round branching timing) when the 7th round of the 10R third jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed to suggest that the long opening round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round end effect or a jackpot end effect), and between rounds (round branching timing) when the 7th round of the 10R second jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed to suggest that the long opening round will be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round continuation effect).

In this way, for the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, a longer interval time (first interval time) is set between the rounds that are branching points (round branching timing) that determine whether or not the long-open round will continue, compared to between other rounds, and this interval time is used to execute the round branching effect. In this way, the jackpot game for the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, in which the round branching effect is executed at the round branching timing, is known as a "rank-up bonus," and is a special jackpot with different gameplay from general jackpots such as the 10R 1st jackpot. Hereinafter, the rank-up bonus may be abbreviated as "RUB."

Here, a round is also referred to as a "round game," and round games are also called "large prize opening/closing games," "variable ball entry games," or "special ball entry games." Additionally, the 5R 6th jackpot and the 5R 7th jackpot are collectively referred to as a "5R jackpot," and the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots and the 10R 8th and 9th jackpots are collectively referred to as a "10R jackpot." Furthermore, the 2nd to 5th jackpots of 10R are also called "special jackpots," and jackpots other than the 2nd to 5th jackpots of 10R (special jackpots) (10R 1st, 8th, and 9th jackpots, 5R 6th and 7th jackpots) are also called "general jackpots," and jackpot games related to general jackpots (5R jackpot games or 10R jackpot games) are also called "first special games," and jackpot games related to special jackpots (rank-up bonus (RUB)) are also called "second special games." Also, when focusing on the number of rounds in jackpot games, 5R jackpot games can also be called "first special games," and 10R jackpot games can also be called "second special games."

In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots based on the number of rounds: a 5R jackpot and a 10R jackpot. However, various other types of jackpots are possible, such as three types: a 3R jackpot, a 6R jackpot, and a 10R jackpot, or one type: a 7R jackpot. In this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot game is 10R (10R jackpot), but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to this; for example, the maximum number of rounds could be more than 10R (for example, 15R) or fewer than 10R (for example, 9R).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to transition the game state after the jackpot game ends to a high-probability state, time-saving state, high-base state, etc., as described below, depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred (won). That is, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a jackpot and the jackpot is any of the aforementioned 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, 5R 6th jackpot, or 10R 8th jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the "high-probability state, time-saving state, and high-base state" as described below (see Figure 6). In contrast, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a jackpot and the jackpot is any of the aforementioned 5R 7th jackpot or 10R 9th jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the "low-probability state, time-saving state, and high-base state" as described below (see Figure 6). For this reason, the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, the 5R 6th jackpot, and the 10R 8th jackpot can be considered "variable jackpots," while the 5R 7th jackpot and the 10R 9th jackpot can be considered "non-variable jackpots" (also called "regular jackpots" or "time-saving jackpots").

Here, with regard to the special jackpot patterns (specific patterns, specific display results) that trigger the execution of a jackpot game, jackpot patterns can be distinguished by jackpot type. For example, when distinguishing between non-variable jackpots and variable jackpots, the jackpot pattern for a non-variable jackpot can be referred to as the "first specific pattern" or "first specific display result," and the jackpot pattern for a variable jackpot can be referred to as the "second specific pattern" or "second specific display result." Furthermore, when distinguishing between general jackpots and special jackpots, the jackpot pattern for a general jackpot can be referred to as the "first specific pattern" or "first specific display result," and the jackpot pattern for a special jackpot can be referred to as the "second specific pattern" or "second specific display result."

As shown in Figures 6 and 8(B), when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1), the distribution probabilities for each jackpot are 5% for a 10R 1st jackpot, 5% for a 10R 2nd jackpot, 7% for a 10R 3rd jackpot, 10% for a 10R 4th jackpot, 13% for a 10R 5th jackpot, 15% for a 5R 6th jackpot, and 45% for a 5R 7th jackpot. In contrast, when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2), the distribution probabilities for each jackpot are 55% for a 10R 8th jackpot, and 45% for a 10R 9th jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering the second starting hole 21 (special chart 2 hit/miss determination), the occurrence rate (allocation probability) of a 10R jackpot is 100%, which is higher than if a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering the first starting hole 20 (special chart 1 hit/miss determination). Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that a jackpot determined based on a ball entering the second starting hole 21 (special chart 2 hit/miss determination) is more likely to be advantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained than a jackpot determined based on a ball entering the first starting hole 20 (special chart 1 hit/miss determination). For this reason, players play in the hope of a ball entering the second starting hole 21. This is particularly noticeable when the extended opening function (described below) is activated (when a high base state occurs), which increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting hole 21.

The determination of whether a jackpot is a hit or a miss is made based on the "special symbol hit/miss determination random number (also referred to as "hit/miss determination information")," and if the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot, the determination of the jackpot type is made based on the "jackpot type determination random number (also referred to as "jackpot type determination information"). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 7 (A), the special symbol hit/miss determination random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 629," and the jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 99." The special symbol hit/miss determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number are random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21. As mentioned above, the jackpot type corresponds to the type of jackpot symbol (see Figure 6). For this reason, the jackpot type determination random number is also referred to as the "symbol determination random number" or "symbol determination information." Note that the various random number values (random number ranges) exemplified in this specification are merely examples and can be set arbitrarily depending on the control specifications.

The random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 include a random number for determining whether a special symbol has been hit or not, a random number for determining the type of jackpot, and a "random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern determination information")" as shown in Figure 7 (A). The random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern, including the fluctuation time, and in this embodiment takes a value in the range of "0 to 198".

Furthermore, the random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the passage of gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been drawn, as shown in Figure 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been drawn is a random number used to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens second starting hole 21 (normal symbol lottery), and in this embodiment takes a value in the range of "0 to 240."

[Game Status]
Next, we will explain the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has multiple gaming states depending on the combination of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for special symbols, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening extension function for normal electric devices, which are in an activated or deactivated state. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is also called the "high probability state" or "probability variable state," and the state in which it is not activated is also called the "low probability state,""normalstate," or "non-probability variable state."

In the high probability state, the probability of a special symbol being determined to be a jackpot is higher than in the normal state (low probability state). That is, in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state is used to determine whether a symbol has been selected, and in the high probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, in which the value of the special symbol random number that is determined to be a jackpot is higher than in the normal state, is used to determine whether a symbol has been selected (see Figure 8 (A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display will result in a jackpot (the stopped symbol will be a jackpot symbol) is higher than when it is not activated.

The state in which the time-saving function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is activated is also referred to as the "time-saving state" or "reduced fluctuation state," while the state in which it is not activated is also referred to as the "non-time-saving state" or "normal fluctuation state." In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to its end (determined display) also referred to as the "special symbol fluctuation time") is shorter than the average value of the special symbol fluctuation time in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table that is determined so that fluctuation patterns with short special symbol fluctuation times (also referred to as "reduced fluctuation patterns") are more likely to be selected than in the non-time-saving state (see Figures 9A and 9B). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of special symbol reserve consumption is faster, and effective balls entering the starting hole (balls that can be stored as special symbol reserves) are more likely to occur. This allows for smooth gameplay and the aim of winning a jackpot.

The probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one may operate. The probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function for normal symbols operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time reduction function for special symbols. In other words, the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function for normal symbols operate in the time-saving state for special symbols, but do not operate in the non-time-saving state. For this reason, in the time-saving state, the probability of a hit in the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the time-saving state, the normal symbol hit/miss judgment (normal symbol judgment) is performed using a normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is judged to be a hit is greater than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time-saving state (see Figure 8 (C)).

In the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time (the time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display to its end (confirmed display), also referred to as the "normal symbol fluctuation time") is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time in the non-time-saving state is 30 seconds, and the normal symbol fluctuation time in the time-saving state is 1 second (see Figure 8 (D)). Also, in the time-saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game (normal symbol winning game) is longer than in the non-time-saving state. Additionally, in the time-saving state, the opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22 is activated, and the number of times the second start port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit in the non-time-saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs a single 0.2-second opening operation, and when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit in the time-saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs three 2.0-second opening operations.

When the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, as well as the opening time extension function and opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22, are activated, the second starting hole 21 opens more frequently and game balls enter the second starting hole 21 more frequently than when these functions are not activated. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these functions are activated is also called the "high base state" or "high frequency state," and the state in which they are not activated is also called the "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the game balls you have in hand (held balls).

The high base state (high frequency state) does not necessarily require all of the above functions to be activated. In other words, it is sufficient that the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22 makes it easier for the second starting hole 21 to open (higher ball entry frequency) compared to when that function is not activated. The high base state may also be controlled independently, without being associated with the time-saving state for special symbols. A function that generates such a high base state is also called a "high base generation function."

As mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when any of the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, the 5R 6th jackpot, and the 10R 8th jackpot occurs, the game state after the jackpot game (after the special game) becomes a high probability state for the special symbol, a time-saving state for the special symbol, and a high base state (see Figure 6). This game state is also called the "high probability, high base state." The high probability, high base state ends when the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot occurs and the jackpot game is executed. This high probability, high base state becomes what is known as a "probability variable state" for the player.

In addition, if either the 5R 7th jackpot or the 10R 9th jackpot occurs, the game state after the jackpot game (after the special game) will be the normal state (low probability state) for the special symbol, as well as the time-saving state and high base state for the special symbol (see Figure 6). This game state is also called the "low probability high base state." The low probability high base state ends when the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times), or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three gaming states can be set as gaming states in which the variable display of special symbols (identification information) can be executed: a "low probability low base state," a "low probability high base state," and a "high probability high base state." In addition, it may also be possible to set a "high probability low base state" in which the special symbol has a high probability, the special symbol has no time-saving state, and the base state is low.

In a high-base state, such as a low-probability high-base state or a high-probability high-base state, hitting the ball with the right to allow it to enter the right play area 3B is advantageous for gameplay. In a high-base state, the second start hole 21 is more likely to open than in a low-base state, making it easier for the ball to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20 (the ball is more likely to enter the second start hole than the first start hole). For this reason, a right-handed hit is performed to allow the ball to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through gate 28, which triggers the determination of whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. This allows for more start holes (opportunities to determine whether the special symbol is a hit or not) than when hitting with the left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner, indicating that the game is in a state where the ball should be launched toward the right play area 3B (right-handed hit instruction notification).

In contrast, in a low base state (e.g., a low-probability low base state), it is more advantageous to hit the ball from the left to enter the left play area 3A. In a low base state, the second start hole 21 is less likely to open than in a high base state, making it easier for the ball to enter the first start hole 20 than the second start hole 21 (the ball is more likely to enter the first start hole than the second start hole). Therefore, a left-handed hit is made to cause the ball to enter the first start hole 20. This allows for more start holes (opportunities to determine whether a special symbol has been hit) than when a right-handed hit is made. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, indicating that the game is in a state where the ball should be launched toward the left play area 3A (left-handed hit instruction notification).

The launch direction indicator 47 has two LEDs, "yz," and can indicate the launch direction by lighting the LEDs depending on the game state. For example, in a low base state, it can indicate that the ball should be launched into the left game area by displaying "y□z□" (e.g., □: off, ■: on) with both LEDs turned off. In a high base state, it can indicate that the ball should be launched into the right game area by displaying "y■z■" (e.g., □: off, ■: on) with both LEDs turned on.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the low-probability, low base state in which no jackpot game is being played is used as a reference, this low-probability, low base state can be considered a "normal gaming state," and gaming in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable gaming) can be considered a "normal gaming state." On the other hand, since the high-probability, high base state and the low-probability, high base state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability, low base state, these high-probability, high base states and low-probability, high base states can be considered "special gaming states," and gaming in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in these states can be considered "special gaming." Of the variable gaming states, the low-probability, low base state is also referred to as the "first gaming state," and either or both of the low-probability, high base state and the high-probability, high base state are also referred to as the "second gaming state." Furthermore, focusing on the probability of winning a jackpot, a low probability state (a low probability, low base state or a low probability, high base state) can also be referred to as the "first gaming state," and a high probability state (a high probability, low base state or a high probability, high base state) can also be referred to as the "second gaming state."

A jackpot game is a game that can be played by changing the display of a special symbol and stopping the display of the jackpot symbol. Because the player can win a large number of prize balls by having a game ball enter the jackpot slot 30, a game state in which a jackpot game is played can be said to be a more advantageous game state for the player than a game state in which a jackpot game is not played (variable game state). Therefore, compared to a game state in which a jackpot game is not played, a game state in which a jackpot game is played can be considered a "special game state," and a jackpot game played in this state can be considered a "special game."

Furthermore, low base states such as a low-probability low base state and a high-probability low base state are game states in which the game progresses by hitting the game ball into the left game area 3A with a left hit, as described above, and therefore the low base state can be considered a "left-hit game state." On the other hand, high base states such as a low-probability high base state and a high-probability high base state, and states in which a jackpot game is played, aiming for the game ball to enter the large prize opening, are game states in which the game progresses by hitting the game ball into the right game area 3B with a right hit, as described above, and therefore the high base state and jackpot game state can be considered a "right-hit game state." As mentioned above, in the high base state (right-hand play state), the second starting hole 21 is more likely to open than in the low base state (left-hand play state), making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 21 than the first starting hole 20. Furthermore, the system is set up so that a player is more likely to win a jackpot based on a second special symbol being determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 than a jackpot based on a first special symbol being determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. For this reason, the left-hand play state can be considered a "normal play state," and a game in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable play) can be considered a "normal play." Furthermore, the right-hand play state, which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the left-hand play state, can be considered a "special play state," and a game in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable play) can be considered a "special play state." In this case, the left-hand play state (low base state) is also called the "first play state," and the right-hand play state is also called the "second play state."

Furthermore, when compared to a low-probability, low-base state, the high-probability, low-base state is similar in that both are low-base states; however, in the high-probability state, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, and the probability that the variable display of the special symbol will result in a jackpot is higher than in the low-probability state. Therefore, the high-probability, low-base state, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability, low-base state, can be considered a "special game state," and gameplay in which the variable display of the special symbol occurs in this state (variable gameplay) can be considered a "special game." In this case, the low-probability, low-base state is also referred to as the "first game state," and the high-probability, low-base state is also referred to as the "second game state."

The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) controls the setting and transition of the various game states described above. The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the activation/deactivation of the probability fluctuation function, functions as a probability setting means that can set the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the special symbol hit/miss determination to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability). The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the activation/deactivation of the fluctuation time reduction function, also functions as a shortened fluctuation state setting means (time-shortened state setting means) that can set a shortened fluctuation state (time-shortened state) in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than normal.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (game control means) (control processing by the main control unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 36. Note that counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. Also, in this specification, "S"("S" in the flowchart) such as S101 means a step.

When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and power begins to be supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game control microcomputer 81 reads and executes the main control processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. As shown in the figure, the main control processing begins with initial setup (S101). This initial setup includes, for example, stack setup, constant setup, interrupt time setup, CPU setup on the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller), as well as resetting various flags, status, and counters. The initial value of a flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of a status is "1," and the initial value of a counter is "0." The initial setup (S101) is performed only once after power is turned on (when power is turned on) and is not performed thereafter.

Furthermore, if the RAM clear switch (not shown) is pressed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, i.e., if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed, the RAM (also referred to as the "predetermined memory area") of the main control board 80 is initialized and a RAM clear command is sent to the sub-control board 90. RAM initialization is also referred to as "RAM clear." The power-on switch (power switch) is located on the power supply board 109 (see Figure 2), and the RAM clear switch is located near the power switch. This initialization of the RAM of the main control board 80 (RAM clear) corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing that initializes the stored contents of the predetermined memory area," and the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the initialization (initialization processing) of the RAM of the main control board 80 corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing execution means."

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in Figure 7 are updated by incrementing them by 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter values (random number values) are sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are permitted (S104). While interrupts are permitted, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. Interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at 4 ms intervals. Then, between the end of interrupt processing (S105) and the start of the next interrupt processing (S105), the update process for various counter values performed by the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU when interrupts are prohibited, interrupt processing (S105) does not start immediately, but rather starts after interrupts are permitted (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub-control board 90, the dispensing control board 110, etc. A command consists of, for example, two bytes of information, in which case the upper byte is information regarding the type of command and the lower byte is information regarding the content of the command. Examples of information contained in commands that can be output from the main control board 80 include information about the game status (also referred to as "game status information"), information about the results of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (also referred to as "hit/miss judgment result information"), information about the type of jackpot (type of jackpot pattern) (also referred to as "jackpot type information" or "jackpot pattern information"), information about the number of special pattern reserves stored (reservation number) (also referred to as "storage information" or "reservation number information"), information about the change pattern of the special pattern (also referred to as "change pattern information"), and information about the results of the preliminary judgment described below (also referred to as "preliminary judgment result information").

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), detection signals detected by various sensors (first start opening sensor 20a, second start opening sensor 21a, special prize opening sensor 30a, etc.) attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are read and stored in the output buffer of RAM as prize ball information. In addition, a detection signal from a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 62 is full is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal and special symbol main random number update process (S203) that is performed next is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) that is performed in the main control main process of Figure 10. In other words, the update process for the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in Figure 7 is performed both during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and during other periods (the period from the end of the interrupt process (S105) until the start of the next interrupt process (S105)).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the following processes are executed: start gate sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal symbol operation process (S206), special symbol operation process (S207), reserved ball count process (S208), and power interruption monitoring process (S209), which are described below. After that, other processes not closely related to the present invention (S210) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. The main control main process steps S102 to S104 are then repeatedly executed (see Figure 10) until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80. When the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 ms later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands and other information set in the RAM output buffer during the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
12, in the start gate sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether the gaming ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If the gaming ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305. If the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols (the number of reserved normal symbols, specifically the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is not less than four (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of reserved normal symbol balls is less than four (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for determining whether a normal symbol has been selected (label -TRND-H, see Figure 7(B)) stored in the update value memory area of RAM (not shown) is acquired, and the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls in the normal symbol reserve memory section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 21, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S305). If a gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. If a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 21 (YES in S305), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 (the number of reserved second symbols, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved second symbols provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (the upper limit) (S306). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is less than 4 (YES in S306), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 (S307).

Next, the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit (labeled TRND-A) (also referred to as the "random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit"), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (labeled TRND-AS) (also referred to as the "random number value for determining the jackpot type"), and the value of the random number counter for determining the fluctuation pattern (labeled TRND-T1) (also referred to as the "random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern") stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM are acquired (in other words, the values of each random number shown in Figure 7(A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values (acquired information) are stored in the address space in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is less than four and a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the condition for acquiring a special symbol 2 related random number (acquisition condition) is met, and this triggers the acquisition of the values of the special symbol 2 related random numbers (random number value for determining whether a special symbol has been hit, random number value for determining the type of jackpot, random number value for determining the variation pattern) and these are stored as the second special symbol reserved (reserved information).

Next, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 20, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S309). If a gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (NO in S309), processing ends. If a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (YES in S309), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (the number of reserved first special charts, specifically the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (the upper limit) (S310). If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), processing ends. However, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is less than 4 (YES in S310), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (S311).

Next, the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), similar to the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol hit/miss determination counter (label-TRND-A) (random number value for special symbol hit/miss determination), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) (random number value for jackpot type determination), and the value of the fluctuation pattern determination random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (random number value for fluctuation pattern determination) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of RAM are acquired (i.e., the values of each random number shown in Figure 7 (A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in the address space in the first special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to the current number of special symbol 1 reserved balls. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is less than four and a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the condition for acquiring a random number related to special symbol 1 (acquisition condition) is met, and this triggers the acquisition of the values of the random numbers related to special symbol 1 (random number value for determining whether a special symbol has been hit, random number value for determining the type of jackpot, random number value for determining the variation pattern) and these are stored as the first reserved special symbol (reserved information).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) and the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the above-mentioned start port sensor detection process (S204), functions as an "acquisition means."

[Processing at the time of starting the ball]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start gate sensor detection process (S204) followed by the start ball entry process (S205). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it determines whether the number of reserved balls for the special game 2 has increased by "1" (S315). If it determines that the number of reserved balls for the special game 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), it proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special game 2 in S307 of the start gate sensor detection process (S204) based on the entry of a game ball into the second start gate. On the other hand, if it determines that the number of reserved balls for the special game 2 has not increased (NO in S315), it proceeds to S319.

In S316, the most recently acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) of the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is read (S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol (random number value for the second special symbol reserved) is determined (S317).

In S317, a hit or miss (jackpot or miss) is determined based on the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit or miss, out of the random number values read in S316, and if the result of this determination is a hit, the type of hit is determined based on the random number value for determining the type of hit.

The hit/miss determination made by S317 is equivalent to a pre-determination (so-called "reserve pre-read") of the hit/miss determination for the second special chart reserved that is the subject of said determination, made prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below. In other words, the result of the hit/miss determination made when the second special chart reserved is consumed (whether it is a jackpot or a miss) is determined (pre-read) prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below.

The determination of the jackpot type by S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (pre-reading of reserves) made prior to the Special Chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below, when the second special chart reserve that is the subject of said determination is a jackpot reserve (also referred to as a "jackpot reserve") and the jackpot type for that reserve is determined to be a jackpot. In other words, if the result of the hit/miss determination made when the second special chart reserve is consumed is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined (pre-reading) prior to the Special Chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below. Note that the determination of the jackpot type by S317 is also a determination of the jackpot pattern. In other words, the jackpot pattern that will be determined when the second special chart reserve (jackpot reserve) that will result in a jackpot is consumed is determined (pre-reading) prior to the Special Chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below.

In addition, in S317, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination random number value from the obtained random number values read in S316. The determination of the fluctuation pattern by S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (reserve pre-reading) made prior to the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203) described below to select the fluctuation pattern for the second special chart reserve that is the subject of this determination. In other words, the fluctuation pattern that will be selected (determined) when the second special chart reserve is consumed is determined (pre-read) prior to the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203) described below.

The preliminary determination of whether or not a win has occurred (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random number value for determining whether or not a win has occurred read out in S316 with the random number value for determining whether or not a win has occurred (win/lose determination value) in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 8 (A), i.e., the jackpot determination table for high-probability states if the game state at the time of reserve consumption is a high-probability state, or the jackpot determination table for normal states if the game state is normal (low-probability state). In this case, if the random number value for determining whether or not a win has occurred read out in S316 matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination value) among the win/lose determination values in the jackpot determination table, the preliminary determination of whether or not a win has occurred is a jackpot; if they do not match, the preliminary determination of whether or not a win has occurred is a miss.

The preliminary determination of the jackpot type (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random number value for determining the jackpot type read in S316 with the random number value for determining the jackpot type (jackpot type determination value) in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B), i.e., the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol if the special symbol reserve being determined is the first special symbol reserve, or the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol if the special symbol reserve being determined is the second special symbol reserve. In this case, the random number value for determining the jackpot type read in S316 matches one of the jackpot type determination values in the jackpot type determination table, and the jackpot type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value becomes the preliminary determination result of the jackpot type.

The preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern (S317) can be performed, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern tables shown in Figures 9A and 9B. That is, if the game state at the time of reserved consumption is a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern table for the non-time-saving state (see Figure 9A) is used, and if it is a time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving state (see Figure 9B) is used. This can be performed by comparing the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern read out in S316 with the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern determination value) in the fluctuation pattern table, depending on the preliminary determination result of whether the game is a win or a loss (jackpot or loss). In this case, the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern read out in S316 matches one of the fluctuation pattern determination values in the fluctuation pattern table, depending on the preliminary determination result of whether the game is a win or a loss (jackpot or loss). The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the matching fluctuation pattern determination value becomes the preliminary determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in S318, command data including information regarding the results of the preliminary determination made in S317 (preliminary determination of second special chart reserve) (preliminary determination result information), specifically information that can identify the preliminary determination result of whether it will be a hit or a miss (also referred to as "preliminary determination result information"), information that can identify the preliminary determination result of the jackpot type (also referred to as "preliminary determination result information of the jackpot type"), and information that can identify the preliminary determination result of the fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "preliminary determination result information of the fluctuation pattern"), is generated as a special chart 2 start ball entry command, and this command is set in the output buffer of RAM (S318). Note that the special chart 2 start ball entry command may also include information indicating some or all of the special chart 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 as preliminary determination result information.

By having the sub-controller 90 analyze the special chart 2 start ball entry command sent from the main control unit 80 (output by the output process (S201)), the sub-controller 90 can determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what the jackpot type is, what the fluctuation pattern is, etc. In other words, the sub-controller 90 can execute effects based on the pre-determination result information identified by the received special chart 2 start ball entry command. This also applies when the sub-controller 90 receives the special chart 1 start ball entry command described below. Either or both of the special chart 1 start ball entry command and the special chart 2 start ball entry command are also referred to as "start ball entry commands." Effects based on the pre-determination result information identified by the start ball entry command (also referred to as "pre-determination effects" or "pre-reading effects") can include effects that suggest the possibility of a jackpot (the expectation level controlled by the special game state; hereinafter simply referred to as "expectation level"), fluctuation patterns, etc.

Next, in S319, similar to the processing related to Special Chart 2 described above, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 has increased by "1" (S319). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), processing proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 in S311 of the start port sensor detection processing (S204) based on a game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 has not increased (NO in S319), processing ends as is.

In S320, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S320). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., that the base state is high (YES in S320), this processing ends without performing the processing from S321 onwards. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is OFF, i.e., that the base state is low (NO in S320), the processing proceeds to the preliminary determination processing from S321 onwards.

Here, when the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., when the current game state is in a high base state, the extended opening function, which increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting hole 21, is activated, making it easier to determine whether or not special symbol 2 is a hit (determining whether or not the second special symbol is a hit). Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described below, the consumption of the second special symbol reserve (displaying the second special symbol fluctuation) is executed in priority over the consumption of the first special symbol reserve (displaying the first special symbol fluctuation) (a so-called special symbol 2 priority fluctuation machine). In this configuration, for example, if a pre-determination of special symbol 1 is made and the result is notified to the player through a preview or other presentation, and the result of the pre-determination is clearly indicated as a jackpot, the player can take advantage of the priority consumption of the second special symbol reserve (priority fluctuation of the second special symbol) to intentionally eliminate the second special symbol reserve (set it to "0") at any time, thereby enabling technical intervention such as intentionally generating a jackpot related to the special symbol 1 indicated by the pre-determination result. From the perspective of fairness in gaming, it is undesirable for players to be able to adjust the timing of the jackpot in this way. For this reason, if the current gaming state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S320), the process related to the preliminary determination of Special Chart 1 from S321 onwards is not performed, and this process ends.

The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as the processing of S316 to S318 described above, but for special symbol 1. That is, the most recently acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is read (S321), and a preliminary judgment is made on the acquired random number value related to the read first special symbol (random number value of the first special symbol reserved) (S322).

In the advance determination by S322 (advance determination of first special chart reserve), similar to the advance determination by S317 (advance determination of second special chart reserve), advance determination of hit/miss, advance determination of jackpot type, and advance determination of fluctuation pattern is made. Of the advance determinations by S322, the advance determination of hit/miss and advance determination of jackpot type are made prior to the special chart 1 hit/miss determination process (S1207) described below, and the advance determination of fluctuation pattern is made prior to the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208) described below.

The advance determination of whether or not a win has occurred, the advance determination of the type of jackpot, and the advance determination of the fluctuation pattern by S322 can be performed in the same manner as the advance determination of whether or not a win has occurred, the advance determination of the type of jackpot, and the advance determination of the fluctuation pattern by S317 described above, based on the jackpot determination table (see Figure 8(A)), the jackpot type determination table (see Figure 8(B)), and the fluctuation pattern table (see Figures 9A and 9B), respectively. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the advance determination of whether or not a win has occurred, the advance determination of the type of jackpot, and the advance determination of the fluctuation pattern by S322 will be omitted.

Then, command data including information (preliminary judgment result information) regarding the results of the preliminary judgment made by S322 (preliminary judgment of first special drawing reservation) is generated as a special drawing 1 start-entry command, and this command is set in the output buffer of RAM (S323). The special drawing 1 start-entry command is the same as the special drawing 2 start-entry command described above. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the special drawing 1 start-entry command will be omitted.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the processes of S317 and S322 in the above-mentioned starting ball entry process (S205), functions as the "determination means." Furthermore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the preliminary determination (S322) of the special chart 1 acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20, functions as the "first determination means," and the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the preliminary determination (S317) of the special chart 2 acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the second starting hole 21, functions as the "second determination means."

Here, the fluctuation pattern tables used in the preliminary determination of fluctuation patterns (S317, S322) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208) described below will be explained with reference to Figures 9A and 9B. In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern tables include a fluctuation pattern table for a non-time-saving state (also referred to as the "first fluctuation pattern table") used when the game state when a variable game (variable display of special symbols) is executed is a non-time-saving state, and a fluctuation pattern table for a time-saving state (also referred to as the "second fluctuation pattern table") used when the game state when a variable game is executed is a time-saving state. Figure 9A shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a non-time-saving state (first fluctuation pattern table), and Figure 9B shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a time-saving state (second fluctuation pattern table). Note that the data structure of the fluctuation pattern table, the types (contents) of fluctuation patterns specified in the fluctuation pattern table, the number of fluctuation patterns, etc. are not limited to those shown in this embodiment and can be changed as appropriate depending on the playability and specifications of the pachinko game machine.

As mentioned above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has three gaming states in which variable play (variable display of identification information) is possible: a low-probability low base state, a low-probability high base state, and a high-probability high base state, and can be controlled to any one of these gaming states. The low base state (low-probability low base state) is a state (left-hitting state) in which play is advanced by hitting the ball leftward with the aim of landing the ball in the first starting hole 20. It is a gaming state in which the main focus is on a game in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as "first variable play"), and it is also a non-time-saving state in which the variable time-saving function is not activated. For this reason, the variable pattern table for the non-time-saving state (first variable pattern table) shown in Figure 9A is used primarily to determine (judge) the variable display pattern of the first special symbol in the low base state. However, although the possibility is low, if a variable display of the second special symbol is executed due to a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 in a low base state, the first variable pattern table is used to display the variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) is a state (right hit state) in which the game is played by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of landing the ball in the second starting hole 21, and the game mainly involves the variable display of the second special symbol (also referred to as "second variable game"). Because the high base state is also a time-saving state in which the variable time reduction function is activated, the variable pattern table for the time-saving state (second variable pattern table) shown in Figure 9B is mainly used in the high base state when determining (judging) the variable pattern of the variable display of the second special symbol. However, although the possibility is low, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed due to a game ball landing in the first starting hole 20 in the high base state, the second variable pattern table is used for the variable display of the first special symbol.

As shown in Figure 9A, the first variation pattern table covers variation patterns P1 to P10. In the first variation pattern table, a variation pattern determination random number value (random number range) is set for each of variation patterns P1 to P10 as a judgment value (also called a "variation pattern judgment value") for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display. Of variation patterns P1 to P10, variation patterns P1 to P3 are jackpot variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, and variation patterns P4 to P10 are miss variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss. The variation pattern judgment value is also called "judgment information."

Fluctuation patterns P1, P2, P4, and P5 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms, fluctuation patterns P3 and P6 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P7 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P8 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P9 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4,000 ms, and fluctuation pattern P10 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2,000 ms. The contents of each of these fluctuation patterns (the contents of the fluctuation performance executed based on each fluctuation pattern) are as shown in Figure 9A, and will be described in detail below.

The fluctuation pattern determination values corresponding to each of fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) are all the same regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P1 is "0 to 74" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display begins, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P2 is "75 to 149" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display begins, and the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P3 is "150 to 198" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display begins.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to each of fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 (miss fluctuation patterns) may be the same regardless of the number of special balls reserved (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins, or it may differ depending on the number of special balls reserved (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P4 is "0 to 3" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P5 is "4 to 7" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts. In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P4 and the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P5 are both the same (common) regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P6 is "8 to 20" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2," and is "8 to 17" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P6 is composed of a value ("8 to 17") that corresponds to fluctuation pattern P6 regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and a value ("18 to 20") that may or may not correspond to fluctuation pattern P6 depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts. Therefore, the range (random number range) of the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P6 differs depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P7 is "21 to 38" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2," "18 to 38" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3," and "18 to 33" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P7 is composed of a value ("21 to 33") that corresponds to fluctuation pattern P7 regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and values ("18 to 20" and "34 to 38") that may or may not correspond to fluctuation pattern P7 depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts. Therefore, the range (random number range) of the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P7 differs depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to each of fluctuation patterns P8 to P10 (miss fluctuation patterns) may or may not be set depending on the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P8 is set to "39 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P8 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4." For this reason, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is a miss and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4," fluctuation pattern P8 will not appear.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P9 is set to "39 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2" or "4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P9 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2" or "4." For this reason, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is a miss and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts is "1," "2," or "4," fluctuation pattern P9 will not appear.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P10 is set to "34 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "4," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2," or "3." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P10 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "4," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2," or "3." For this reason, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is a miss and the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts is "1," "2," or "3," fluctuation pattern P9 will not appear.

With this first fluctuation pattern table, for example, if a game ball enters the first start hole 20 (also referred to as the "first start ball entry") in a non-time-saving state (low-probability, low-base state), and the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 when the preliminary determination (S322) of the fluctuation pattern related to the first start ball entry is made differs from the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 when the Special Chart 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208) related to the first start ball entry is made (when the fluctuation display begins), there will be no inconsistency between the presentation based on the result of the preliminary determination (Special Chart 1 start ball entry command) related to the first start ball entry and the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation, for fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) and fluctuation patterns P4 and P5 (miss fluctuation patterns).

In other words, for example, in a non-time-saving state (low-probability, low-base state), if the first starting ball hits when variable play is not being performed, the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 will change from "0" to "1" due to the first starting ball hitting, and the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 immediately after the first starting ball hits will be "1." The number of reserved balls for Special Chart immediately after the starting ball hits is also referred to as the "number of reserved balls at the time of starting ball hit." After that, the variable display based on the first starting ball hit (the starting ball hit when variable play is not being performed) begins immediately, so the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 at the start of the variable display is "1." The number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 at the start of the variable display is also referred to as the "number of reserved balls at the start of variable play." In this case, the number of reserved balls at the time of starting ball hit and the number of reserved balls at the start of variable play are both "1," and the number of reserved balls at the time of starting ball hit and the start of variable play are the same.

On the other hand, for example, suppose the first starting ball occurs in a non-time-saving state (low-probability, low-base state), and the occurrence of the first starting ball causes the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 1 to change from "1" to "2." In this case, the number of reserved balls at the time of the starting ball is "2." The first special chart reserve corresponding to the first starting ball is called the "target reserve." If the target reserve is subsequently consumed without the first starting ball occurring before the target reserve is consumed, the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 1 will decrease in the order of "2," "1," and "0." When the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 1 changes from "1" to "0," that is, the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuations based on the target reserve is "1" (the number of reserved balls becomes "0" when the fluctuation display begins). Furthermore, if the first starting ball occurs before the target reserve is consumed, the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuations based on the target reserve can fluctuate between "1" and "4."

In this way, the number of reserved balls at the time of the initial ball entry may or may not be the same when the fluctuation starts. In this regard, according to the first fluctuation pattern table, for fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) and fluctuation patterns P4 and P5 (miss fluctuation patterns), the fluctuation pattern determination value is the same regardless of the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display begins (see Figure 9A), so there is no inconsistency between the presentation based on the results of the advance determination regarding the first initial ball entry (special chart 1 initial ball entry command) and the fluctuation pattern determined when the fluctuation starts.

The above is an explanation of the first fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving mode), but the same can be said for the second fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for time-saving mode). That is, as shown in Figure 9B, the second fluctuation pattern table covers fluctuation patterns P11 to P18. In the second fluctuation pattern table, a random number value (random number range) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set for each of fluctuation patterns P11 to P18 as a fluctuation pattern determination value. Of fluctuation patterns P11 to P18, fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 are jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the hit/miss determination result is a jackpot, and fluctuation patterns P14 to P18 are miss fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the hit/miss determination result is a miss.

Fluctuation patterns P11 and P14 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms, fluctuation patterns P12 and P15 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms, fluctuation patterns P13 and P16 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P17 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12,000 ms, and fluctuation pattern P18 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1,000 ms. The contents of each of these fluctuation patterns (the contents of the fluctuation performance executed based on each fluctuation pattern) are as shown in Figure 9B, and will be described in detail below.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to each of fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) is the same regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P11 is "0 to 69" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display begins, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P12 is "70 to 139" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display begins, and the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P13 is "140 to 198" regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display begins.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to each of fluctuation patterns P14 to P16 (miss fluctuation patterns) may be the same regardless of the number of special balls reserved (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins, or it may differ depending on the number of special balls reserved (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P14 is set to "0 to 1" regardless of the number of special balls reserved when the fluctuation display begins. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P14 is set to the same regardless of the number of special balls reserved when the fluctuation display begins.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P15 is "2 to 5" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1," and is "2 to 3" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2, 3, or 4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P15 is composed of a value ("2 to 3") that corresponds to fluctuation pattern P15 regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and a value ("4 to 5") that may or may not correspond to fluctuation pattern P15 depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts. Therefore, the range (random number range) of the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P15 differs depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P16 is "6 to 11" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1," and is "4 to 9" when the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2, 3, or 4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P16 is composed of a value ("6 to 9") that corresponds to fluctuation pattern P16 regardless of the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and values ("4 to 5" and "10 to 11") that may or may not correspond to fluctuation pattern P16 depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts. Therefore, the range (random number range) of the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P16 differs depending on the number of special chart reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to each of fluctuation patterns P17 and P18 (miss fluctuation pattern) may or may not be set depending on the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display begins.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P17 is set to "12 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P17 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4." For example, in the time-saving state, if the result of the second special symbol judgment is a miss and the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls when the second special symbol fluctuation display starts is "2," "3," or "4," fluctuation pattern P17 will not appear.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P18 is set to "10 to 198" when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1." In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P18 is set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4," and is not set when the number of special symbol reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1." For example, in the time-saving state, if the result of the second special symbol judgment is a miss and the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls when the second special symbol fluctuation display starts is "1," fluctuation pattern P18 will not appear.

With this second variation pattern table, for example, if a game ball enters the second start hole 21 (also referred to as the "second start ball entry") in a time-saving state (low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), and the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 when the preliminary determination (S317) of the variation pattern related to the second start ball entry is made differs from the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 when the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) related to the second start ball entry is made (when the variation display begins), there will be no inconsistency between the presentation based on the result of the preliminary determination (special chart 2 start ball entry command) related to the second start ball entry and the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation, for variation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot variation patterns) and variation pattern P14 (miss variation pattern). The reason for this is the same as in the case of the first variation pattern table described above, so explanation will be omitted.

Here, of the fluctuation pattern judgment values (judgment information) set for each of the multiple fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table, the judgment values (judgment values that are considered to be the same regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart when the fluctuation display begins) set for each of fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns), fluctuation patterns P4 and P5 (miss fluctuation patterns), fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot fluctuation patterns), and fluctuation pattern P14 are also referred to as "specific judgment information," and any or all of fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) and fluctuation patterns P4 and P5 (miss fluctuation patterns) that correspond to specific judgment information are also referred to as "specific fluctuation patterns," and any or all of the other fluctuation patterns P6 to P10 and P15 to P18 (fluctuation patterns different from specific fluctuation patterns) are also referred to as "non-specific fluctuation patterns."

When making a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern based on the first fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to determine which of fluctuation patterns P1 to P10 (multiple fluctuation patterns) the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the special chart reservation to be determined will be, or to determine whether or not it will be fluctuation pattern P1, P2, P3, P4, or P5 (specific fluctuation pattern) among fluctuation patterns P1 to P10 (multiple fluctuation patterns), and it is possible to execute a performance (preliminary performance) based on the results of these determinations.

In the preliminary determination of a fluctuation pattern based on the first fluctuation pattern table, a determination of whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be determined will be a specific fluctuation pattern can be made by determining whether the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern determination information) obtained based on the initial ball entry matches a determination value (determination information) in the first fluctuation pattern table that is considered to be the same regardless of the number of reserved special chart balls (if the result of the preliminary determination of whether or not the result is a jackpot, it is "0 to 74," "75 to 149," or "150 to 198," and if it is a miss, it is "0 to 3" or "4 to 7").

When making a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern based on the second fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to determine which of fluctuation patterns P11 to P18 (multiple fluctuation patterns) the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be determined will be, or to determine whether or not it will be fluctuation pattern P11, P12, P13, or P14 (specific fluctuation pattern) among fluctuation patterns P11 to P18 (multiple fluctuation patterns), and it is possible to execute a performance (preliminary performance) based on the results of these determinations.

In the preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern based on the second fluctuation pattern table, a determination of whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be determined will be a specific fluctuation pattern can be made by determining whether the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern determination information) obtained based on the initial ball entry matches a determination value (determination information) in the second fluctuation pattern table that is considered to be the same regardless of the number of reserved special chart balls (if the result of the preliminary determination of whether or not the result is a jackpot, then "0 to 69," "70 to 139," or "140 to 198," and if it is a miss, then "0 to 1").

[General action processing]
After the start ball entry process (S205), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal symbol operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14. In the normal symbol operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and each stage is assigned a normal symbol operation status "1" to "4." If the normal symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed. If the normal symbol operation status is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), the normal symbol variable process (S404) is performed. If the normal symbol operation status is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol determination process (S406) is performed. If the normal symbol operation status is "4" (NO in S401, S403, and S405), the normal electric device process (S407) is performed. The default operating status is "1".

[Normal pattern standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is "0" (S501). If it is "0" (YES in S501), this process ends without performing the process from S502 onwards. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit/miss determination process described below is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol change pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol change pattern selection process, by referring to the normal symbol change pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is in the time-saving state, a normal symbol change pattern with a normal symbol change time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, a normal symbol change pattern with a normal symbol change time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), described below, is performed, followed by the normal symbol variation start process (S505), which then ends this process. The normal symbol variation start process (S505) starts displaying the normal symbol variations based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and sets the normal operation status to "2." The normal symbol variation start process also sets a normal symbol variation start command to notify the sub-control board 90 that the normal symbol variations have begun.

[Normal pattern correctness determination process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol hit determination process (S502), first, the value of the (oldest memory) normal symbol hit determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the lowest area of the normal symbol reserve memory (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first normal symbol reserve) is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (whether the game state is in the time-saving state) (S602). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., the time-saving state is in (YES in S602), a high-probability normal symbol hit determination is made based on the time-saving state table (hit determination value "0" to "239") in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) read out matches one of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the time-saving flag is not ON, i.e., that the game is not in the time-saving mode (NO in S602), a low-probability normal symbol win/loss determination is made based on the table for the non-time-saving mode (win determination values are "0" and "1") from the normal symbol win determination table shown in Figure 8 (C) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.

In S605, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal symbol hit) (S605). If it is determined not to be a hit (miss) (NO in S605), the missing normal symbol (normal symbol miss symbol) to be displayed is determined (S606), and processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), the winning normal symbol (normal symbol hit symbol) to be displayed is determined (S607), the normal symbol hit flag is set ON (S608), and processing ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is subtracted by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each normal symbol reserved in the normal symbol reserved memory unit is shifted one position from the current position to the side where it is read (S702). Then, the address space that is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal symbol reserved memory unit is set to empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal symbol reserved is cleared to 0 (S703), and the process is completed. In this way, the normal symbol reserved is consumed in the reserved order.

[Normal pattern change processing]
As shown in Figure 18, in the normal pattern change processing (S404), first, it is determined whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed (S801), and if not (NO in S801), this processing is terminated without performing the processing from S802 onwards. On the other hand, if the normal pattern change time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal pattern change stop command is set (S802), and the normal pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the normal pattern display (terminating the normal pattern change display) is performed (S804), and this processing is terminated.

[Normal pattern determination process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether the normal symbol winning flag is ON (S901). If the normal symbol winning flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal symbol winning flag is ON (YES in S901), it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., whether the time-saving state is in effect (S902). Then, if the time-saving state is in effect (YES in S902), the opening pattern during the time-saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S903). As mentioned above, the opening pattern during the time-saving state is an opening pattern that repeats a 2.0-second opening three times. In response to this, in S903, the opening pattern of the second start port 21 during the time-saving state is set, and the second start port opening counter, which counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened, is set to "3".

On the other hand, if the game is not in the time-saving mode (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is set to the opening pattern for the non-time-saving mode (S906). As mentioned above, the opening pattern for the non-time-saving mode is an opening pattern that opens once for 0.2 seconds. In response to this, in S906, the opening pattern for the second starting port 21 in the non-time-saving mode is set, and the second starting port opening counter, which counts the number of times the second starting port 21 has opened, is set to "1". Then, following the setting of the opening pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
20, in the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether the normal winning end flag is ON (S1001). The normal winning end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the second starting hole 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game that was executed as a winning.

If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second start port 21 is currently open (S1002). If it is not currently open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether the time (timing) to open the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If not (NO in S1003), this process ends. If it has arrived (YES in S1003), the second start port 21 is opened (S1004), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is open (YES in S1002), it is determined whether the time has come to close the second start port 21 (i.e., whether a predetermined opening time has passed since the second start port 21 was opened) (S1005). If not (NO in S1005), this processing is terminated; if the time has come (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (S1006).

Following the process of closing the second start hole 21 (S1006), the value of the second start hole opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second start hole opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), this process ends so that the second start hole 21 can be opened again. On the other hand, if the value of the second start hole opening counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal win end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the normal win end flag is set (S1010), and this process ends. Note that the second start hole opening counter becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) during the time-saving mode, and becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened once during the non-time-saving mode.

On the other hand, if S1001 determines that the normal symbol win end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has ended the number of times set in S903 or S906, so the normal symbol win end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal symbol win flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and this process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol wait process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (S206).

[Special drawing operation processing]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol operation process (S207) after the normal symbol operation process (S206). As shown in Fig. 21, in the special symbol operation process (S207), the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the big prize device 31 is divided into four stages, and one of the special symbol operation statuses "1" to "4" is assigned to each stage.

If the "special symbol operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol standby processing (S1102) is performed; if it is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special symbol changing processing (S1104) is performed; if it is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol determination processing (S1106) is performed; and if it is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, and S1105), special electric device processing (S1107) is performed as a jackpot game. The special symbol operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby processing]
22, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) is "0" (S1201). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value (acquired random number value, acquired information) acquired due to a ball entering the second starting port 21, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is "0" (S1206). If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), i.e., if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to a ball entering the first starting hole 20, it is determined whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is currently being set to the standby screen (a demo screen for waiting customers is currently being displayed) (S1211). If so (YES in S1211), this process ends without performing S1212. If not (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is performed to display the standby screen (S1212). The standby screen includes the aforementioned effect setting screen (not shown).

In the standby screen setting process (S1212), when the number of reserved balls for special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 and number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) is "0" and variable play is not being performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. The state in which the standby screen is displayed, i.e., the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters (transitions to) when the number of reserved balls for special symbols is "0" and variable play is not being performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds), is also referred to as the "standby state" or "waiting for customers state."

If S1201 determines that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more memories of random number counter values (acquired random number values, acquired information) obtained due to a ball entering the second starting port 21, the Special Chart 2 hit/miss judgment process (S1202), Special Chart 2 change pattern selection process (S1203), Special Chart 2 random number shift process (S1204), and Special Chart 2 change start process (S1205) described below are performed in this order. Furthermore, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of a random number counter value related to the second starting port 21 but there is one or more memories of random number counter values (acquired random number value, acquired information) obtained due to a ball entering the first starting port 20, the special chart 1 pass/fail determination process (S1207), special chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), special chart 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special chart 1 variation start process (S1210) described below are performed in this order.

In this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol variation based on the first special symbol reservation is only performed when the second special symbol reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). In other words, the consumption of the second special symbol reservation (display of the second special symbol variation) is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special symbol reservation (display of the first special symbol variation). In this embodiment, a win/loss determination based on the second special symbol reservation is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than a win/loss determination based on the first special symbol reservation (see Figure 8 (B)).

[Special diagram 2 pass/fail determination process]
As shown in FIG. 23, the special symbol 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) first reads the (oldest) random number value (label-TRND-A) for special symbol hit/miss determination stored in the lowest area of the second special symbol reserved memory section of RAM (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first second special symbol reserved) (S1301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON, i.e., whether the high probability state is present (S1302). If the high probability state is not present (NO in S1302), i.e., if the normal state is present, a hit/miss determination is made based on the normal state jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A) (jackpot determination values are "3" and "397") (S1303). On the other hand, if the high probability state is present (YES in S1302), a hit/miss determination is made based on the high probability state jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3,""53,""113,""173,""227,""281,""337,""397,""449," and "503."

If the result of the hit/miss determination (S1303, S1304) is a "jackpot" (YES in S1305), the random number value for determining the jackpot type (Label-TRND-AS) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining the special symbol hit/miss read in S1301 is read, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 8 (B) (S1307), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1309), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination (S1303, S1304) is not a "jackpot" ("miss") (NO in S1305), the losing symbol is determined (S1306), and this process ends.

Here, when determining the type of jackpot, in the case of a win/loss determination related to the first special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol 1 win/loss determination"), the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of a win/loss determination related to the second special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol 2 win/loss determination"), the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. Note that the special symbol win/loss determination and jackpot type determination can each be referred to as a "determination," or the jackpot determination and the determination of which jackpot symbol will result can be referred to as a "determination." These results are also sometimes referred to as "determination results."

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the win/loss determination for the second special symbol (S1303, S1304) functions as a "special symbol 2 win/loss determination execution means." Furthermore, the win/loss determination for the second special symbol (S1303, S1304) corresponds to the process of determining whether or not to control the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state). Therefore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the win/loss determination for the second special symbol (S1303, S1304) also functions as a "special gaming determination means."

[Special chart 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in Figure 22, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), after the special symbol 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202), the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) is performed. As shown in Figures 24 and 25, in the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not) (S1401). As a result, if it is determined that the time-saving state is not in (NO in S1401), that is, if the time-saving state is not in, it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1402).

In addition, in the non-time-saving state (low base state), the display of the first special symbol changes triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 20 is mainly performed, and the display of the second special symbol changes is rarely performed. Therefore, the process related to selecting (setting) the change pattern of the second special symbol is rarely executed in the non-time-saving state. For example, if a second special symbol is reserved when the game state transitions from the time-saving state (high base state) to the non-time-saving state (low base state), the reserved second special symbol will be consumed in the non-time-saving state, and in this case, the process related to selecting (setting) the change pattern of the second special symbol is executed in the non-time-saving state.

If it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been selected is read out in S1301, along with the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) in S308, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the non-time-saving state jackpot table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving state shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to the jackpot) (S1403). In S1403, one of fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In other words, when a jackpot fluctuation is executed in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation is determined to be one of P1 to P3. Once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is then determined whether the reserved number of second special symbols is "1" or "2" (S1405). The "reserved number" referred to in this process is the number of memories that includes the information used to determine the variation pattern in this process, so the number of reserved memories will be any value between "1" and "4."

If it is determined in S1405 that the reserved number is "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the random number value for determining the variation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol was selected or not read in S1301 described above is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the first table for missed reserved numbers (the portion of the variation pattern table for non-time-saving mode shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to a miss and reserved ball number of "1, 2") (S1406). In S1406, one of variation patterns P4 to P8 is selected. In other words, when a missing variation is executed in non-time-saving mode and the reserved number at the start of the variation is "1" or "2", the variation pattern of the missing variation is determined to be one of P4 to P8.

If it is determined in S1405 that the reserved number is not "1" or "2" (NO in S1405), it is determined whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is "3" (S1407). Then, if it is determined that the reserved number is "3" (YES in S1407), the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit or miss read out in S1301 described above is read out, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the second missed reserved number table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 9A that corresponds to a miss and the reserved ball number of "3") (S1408). In S1408, one of fluctuation patterns P4 to P7, or P9 is selected. In other words, when a miss fluctuation is executed in the non-time-saving state and the reserved number at the start of the fluctuation is "3," the fluctuation pattern of the miss fluctuation is determined to be one of P4 to P7, or P9.

If it is determined in S1407 that the reserved number is not "3" (NO in S1407), that is, if the reserved number is "4," the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol was selected or not read in S1301 described above is read, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the third table for missed reserved numbers (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving mode shown in Figure 9A that corresponds to a miss and the reserved number of balls being "4") (S1409). In S1409, one of fluctuation patterns P4 to P7, or P10 is selected. In other words, when a missing fluctuation is executed in non-time-saving mode and the reserved number at the start of the fluctuation is "4," the fluctuation pattern of the missing fluctuation is determined to be one of P4 to P7, or P10.

Here, the variation pattern with the shortest selectable variation time in the first missed reserved number table (12,000 ms) has a longer variation time than the variation time in the second missed reserved number table (4,000 ms) and the third missed reserved number table (2,000 ms). Furthermore, the first missed reserved number table has a variation pattern selectability (appearance rate) set so that the variation time is relatively longer than the second missed reserved number table and the third missed reserved number table. Therefore, when a missed variation is executed in a non-time-saving state, if the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is less than "3," the variation time is relatively longer, while if the number of reserved balls is "3" or greater, the variation time is relatively shorter, and is even shorter when the number of reserved balls is "4." This makes it possible to efficiently consume missed variations while minimizing interruptions to the variation display (variable play).

Next, we will explain the process for selecting (determining) the special symbol 2 variation pattern in the time-saving mode. That is, if it is determined in S1401 that the time-saving mode is active (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1410). As a result, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1410), the random number value for determining the variation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol has been selected read in S1301 described above is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the time-saving mode jackpot table (the portion of the time-saving mode variation pattern table shown in Figure 9B that corresponds to the jackpot) (S1411). In S1411, one of variation patterns P11 to P13 is selected. In other words, when a jackpot variation is executed in the time-saving mode, the variation pattern for that jackpot variation is determined to be one of P11 to P13.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), it is determined whether the reserved number is "1" (S1412). The reserved number here is the same as described above, and is a value between "1" and "4." If it is determined in S1412 that the reserved number is "1" (YES in S1412), the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol was selected or not read in S1301 described above is read, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the third reserved number miss table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 9B that corresponds to a miss and a reserved ball number of "1") (S1413). In S1413, one of fluctuation patterns P14 to P17 is selected. In other words, if a miss variation is executed in time-saving mode and the number of pending times at the start of the variation is "1," the variation pattern of the miss variation will be determined to be one of P14 to P17.

If it is determined in S1412 that the reserved number is not "1" (NO in S1412), that is, if the reserved number is any of "2" to "4," the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (Label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol was selected or not read in S1301 described above is read, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fourth table for missed reserved numbers (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving mode shown in Figure 9B that corresponds to a miss and reserved ball number of "2 to 4") (S1414). In S1414, one of fluctuation patterns P14 to P16, or P18 is selected. In other words, if a miss fluctuation is executed in the time-saving mode and the reserved number at the start of the fluctuation is any of "2" to "4," the fluctuation pattern of the miss fluctuation is determined to be one of P14 to P16, or P18.

The variation pattern selected in the event of a miss in the time-saving mode is more likely to have a shorter variation time (1000 ms) than the variation pattern selected in the event of a miss in the non-time-saving mode. This is to speed up the consumption of special reserved symbols (miss variations) in the time-saving mode. This allows for faster progress in the variable play during the time-saving mode, making it possible to efficiently aim for a jackpot.

After selecting a fluctuation pattern in the above manner, other processing shown in Figure 24 is performed (S1404), and this processing ends. The other processing (S1404) involves processing such as setting a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the output buffer of RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in a fluctuation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control unit 90 by output processing (S201).

The types and number of special symbol variation patterns (also called "special symbol variation patterns") are not limited to those shown in this example (see Figures 9A and 9B), and the types and number can be arbitrary, such as increasing or decreasing the number of variation patterns compared to this example.

[Special Figure 2 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in Figure 26, in the special chart 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special chart reserved memory unit is shifted one step downward (for example, if the second special chart reserved memory unit consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003", then to the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the second special chart reserved memory unit (S1503), and this process ends.

After executing the special symbol 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1205) is executed as shown in Figure 22. In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1205), the special symbol operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of RAM, thereby starting the variable display of the second special symbol.

[Special Diagram 1 Correctness Determination Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27, the special symbol 1 win/loss determination process (S1207) is performed in the same manner (S1601-S1609) as the special symbol 2 win/loss determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. 23. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 1, in S1601, the random number value for special symbol win/loss determination stored in the lowest area of the first special symbol reserve memory section of RAM (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol) is read and processed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the win/loss determination for the first special symbol (S1603, S1604), functions as a "special symbol 1 win/loss determination execution means." Furthermore, the win/loss determination for the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) corresponds to the process of determining whether or not to control the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a jackpot game state (special game state). Therefore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the win/loss determination for the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) also functions as a "special game determination means."

[Special chart 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in Figures 28 and 29, in the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1714) is performed in the same manner as the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in Figures 24 and 25. Therefore, detailed explanations of this process will be omitted.

In the time-saving state (high base state), the display of the second special symbol changes triggered by a ball entering the second starting hole 21 is primarily performed, and the display of the first special symbol changes is rarely performed. Therefore, the process related to selecting (setting) the first special symbol change pattern is rarely performed in the time-saving state. For example, if the second special symbol reserve is fully consumed in the time-saving state (high base state) (number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 = "0") and the first special symbol reserve is stored, the first special symbol reserve will be consumed in the time-saving state, and in this case, the process related to selecting (setting) the first special symbol change pattern is performed in the time-saving state.

Here, in the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208), the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display is determined based on the result of the hit/miss determination (the result of the determination by the special game determination means), the number of pending balls at the start of the variation (the number of pending balls stored when the variation display begins), the variation pattern determination random number value obtained based on the starting ball (variation pattern determination information obtained by the acquisition means), and the variation pattern determination value (predetermined determination information) in the variation pattern table. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208) functions as the "variation pattern determination means."

When determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving mode, if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0 to 74," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P1 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart; if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "75 to 149," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P2 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart; and if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "150 to 198," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P3 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see Figure 9A). Therefore, in non-time-saving mode, it is possible to cause a jackpot fluctuation due to any of fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 to occur regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance mode of fluctuation patterns P1 to P3.

Furthermore, when selecting (determining) a miss variation pattern based on the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving mode, if the random number value for determining the variation pattern obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0-3," the variation pattern is determined to be P4 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart; if the random number value for determining the variation pattern is "4-7," the variation pattern is determined to be P5 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart; and if the random number value for determining the variation pattern is a value other than "0-7" ("8-198"), the variation pattern is determined to be one of P6-P10 depending on the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see Figure 9A). Therefore, in the non-time-saving mode, a miss variation due to variation patterns P4 or P5 can be generated regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the variation, while a miss variation due to one of variation patterns P6-P10 can be generated depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the variation. In other words, the appearance of variation patterns P4 and P5 can be fixed (stabilized), and the appearance of variation patterns P6-P10 can be adjusted depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the variation.

Furthermore, when determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving mode, if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern obtained based on the initial ball entry is "0-69," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P11 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart; if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "70-139," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P12 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart; and if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "140-198," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P13 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see Figure 9B). Therefore, in the time-saving mode, it is possible to cause a jackpot fluctuation due to one of fluctuation patterns P11-P13 to occur regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance mode of fluctuation patterns P11-P13.

Furthermore, when selecting (determining) a miss variation pattern based on the variation pattern table for the time-saving mode, if the random number value for determining the variation pattern obtained based on the initial ball entry is between 0 and 1, the variation pattern is determined to be P14 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart. If the random number value for determining the variation pattern is a value other than 0 and 1 (between 2 and 198), the variation pattern is determined to be one of P15 to P18 depending on the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see Figure 9B). Therefore, in the time-saving mode, a miss variation due to variation pattern P14 can be made to appear regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the variation, while a miss variation due to one of variation patterns P15 to P18 can be made to appear depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the variation. In other words, the appearance mode of variation pattern P14 can be fixed (stabilized), and the appearance mode of variation patterns P15 to P18 can be adjusted depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the variation.

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in Figure 30, in the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is subtracted by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special chart reserved memory unit is shifted downward by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the first special chart reserved memory unit (S1803), and this process ends.

After executing the special symbol 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1210) is executed as shown in Figure 22. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1210), the special symbol operation status is set to "2" and the variation start command is set in the output buffer of RAM, thereby starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
As shown in Figure 31, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, it is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol, that is, the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned S1203 or S1208 (see Figure 9), has elapsed (S1901). If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process ends without performing the processes from S1902 onwards. This allows the variable display of the special symbol to continue.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter is "0" (S1905). If it is determined that the probability variable counter is "0" (YES in S1905), the probability variable flag is turned OFF and processing proceeds to S1907. The high probability state (probability variable state) ends with processing in S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1903 that the probability variable flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or if it is determined in S1905 that the probability variable counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), processing proceeds to S1907.

In S1907, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of times the special symbol variable display was executed during the time-saving state, is decremented by 1 (S1908), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1909). If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1909), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1910), and processing proceeds to S1911. The time-saving state (and high base state) ends with the processing of S1910. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1907 that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined in S1909 that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), processing proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special symbol operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing is performed (S1912), such as statically displaying the special symbol (ending the variable display of the special symbol) with a display result that corresponds to the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number, and this processing ends. When the game control microcomputer 81 stops (ends) the variable display of the special symbol, it sets the static display time (static display period) for the special symbol (static symbol). Then, when the set static display time (static display period) has elapsed, it performs the special symbol determination process (S1106).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the process of turning off the probability change flag when the probability change counter value reaches "0" and turning off the time-saving flag when the time-saving counter value reaches "0" (S1906, S1910), and functions as a "game status control means."

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is then determined whether the confirmed jackpot (the current jackpot) is a 10R jackpot (S2002). If it is determined to be a 10R jackpot (YES in S2002), the round counter, which counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game, is set to "10" (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the jackpot is not a 10R jackpot (NO in S2002), the confirmed jackpot (the current jackpot) is a 5R jackpot, so the round counter is set to "5" (S2004), and the process proceeds to S2009.

In S2009, a large prize opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) that has been determined is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. As mentioned above, the large prize opening pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot (see Figure 6), so in S2009, a large prize opening pattern (long opening, short opening, number of openings, etc.) corresponding to the currently determined jackpot is set. Then, the opening operation of large prize opening 30 based on the large prize opening pattern set in S2009 is executed in the jackpot game (special game).

In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start jackpot play (S2010). In this embodiment, six types of opening commands are provided: a first opening command corresponding to the first jackpot in 10R, a second opening command corresponding to the second to fifth jackpots in 10R, a third opening command corresponding to the sixth jackpot in 5R, a fourth opening command corresponding to the seventh jackpot in 5R, a fifth opening command corresponding to the eighth jackpot in 10R, and a sixth opening command corresponding to the ninth jackpot in 10R.

In S2010, an opening command is set according to the type of jackpot (starting jackpot) that has been confirmed this time. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) then transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing through output processing (S201). Upon receiving the opening command, the sub-control unit 90 executes a predetermined opening effect based on the opening command. In this embodiment, the opening command corresponding to the second to fifth 10R jackpots is a common command (second opening command), and the opening effects are common (similar effect patterns) for the second to fifth 10R jackpots. This is to make it difficult for players to determine the type of jackpot through effects related to the jackpot (special jackpot), such as opening effects, in consideration of the gameplay of RUB, i.e., the gameplay that draws the player's attention to how long the long opening round will last.

Next, the opening period for the jackpot game begins (S2011), and the special chart operation status is set to "4" (S2012). Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special chart operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and processing ends.

The opening period is a period set before the initial opening operation of the large prize slot begins during jackpot play, and after the stop display time (also called the "stop display period" or "fixed stop period") of the special pattern (effect pattern) that is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern has elapsed, and is a period during which the variable display of the special pattern (effect pattern) cannot be executed. The opening period is also called the "start period," and the effect (opening effect) executed during the opening period (start period) is also called the "start effect." In this embodiment, the opening period is considered to be included in the special game state. However, the opening period may not be included in the special game state.

In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) is determined by the type of jackpot that has been confirmed and the game state when that jackpot is confirmed (when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the opening period can be specified by the opening command described above. Therefore, upon receiving the opening command, the sub-control unit 90 is able to perform an opening performance based on the jackpot type and opening period specified by the opening command. The length of the opening period (opening time) is generally set to a length that allows the player to recognize that a jackpot game has begun, and can be, for example, longer than the jackpot stop display time. The length of the opening period (opening time) may also be varied depending on the game state when a jackpot occurs and the type of jackpot.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the above-mentioned special symbol waiting process (S1102), special symbol variable process (S1104), and special symbol determination process (S1106), functions as a "variable game execution means."

[Special electric device processing (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric device processing (S1107), first, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined that the probability variable flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variable flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. Note that if it is determined in S2101 that the probability variable flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the probability variable flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2103 without performing the process of S2102. Also, if it is determined in S2103 that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S2103), the time-saving flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2105 without processing S2104. In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the game is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, since the game is always in a low base state during a non-time-saving state, the game is also controlled to a low base state during the execution of a jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that all operational processing of the large prize device 31 (opening processing of the large prize opening 30) during jackpot play has ended (the jackpot play has ended). If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is then determined whether it is time to start a round (S2106). This determination is made based on the large prize opening pattern set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether the opening period has ended and it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round. Furthermore, if the first round has already started, it is determined whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval time has passed (the interval period has ended).

If it is determined in S2106 that it is time to start a round (YES in S2106), a round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and the special prize opening process is performed (S2108). This causes the special prize opening 30 to be opened, and the specified round begins. In S2107, a round start command that can identify the round to begin is set, such as a "1R start command" for the start of the first round, or a "2R start command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is sent to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201. Furthermore, in the special prize opening process of S2108, the opening/closing member 32 is operated (opened) to open the special prize opening 30 based on the special prize opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed, i.e., the special prize opening pattern set in S2009 described above.

If it is determined in S2106 that it is not time to start a round (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2112. Examples of times when it is determined that it is not time to start a round include the opening period before the start of a round, during round play, and during the interval period after the end of round play (during the process of closing the large prize opening).

In S2112, it is determined whether the special prize opening operation is currently being performed, i.e., whether the special prize opening opened by the processing of S2108 is still open (during a round of play) (S2112). As a result, if it is determined that the special prize opening operation is not currently being performed (during a round of play) (NO in S2112), the processing proceeds to S2116. If it is determined that the special prize opening operation is currently being performed (during a round of play) (YES in S2112), it is determined whether the end condition for the ongoing round of play (round end condition) has been met (S2113).

In this embodiment, the round end conditions are defined as follows: (1) the opening time (e.g., 25 seconds) of the special prize opening set for the ongoing round game, i.e., the execution time of the round game, has elapsed; and (2) a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have entered the special prize opening during the ongoing round game. If either of the conditions is met first, the round end condition is met based on the condition that was met first. If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition has not been met (NO in S2113), processing ends.

If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition has been met (YES in S2113), a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2114), and processing proceeds to S2115. In S2114, a round end command that can identify the round that is ending is set, such as a "1R end command" for the end of the first round, or a "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is sent to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

In S2115, the special prize opening closure process is performed, and the opening/closing member 32 of the special prize opening 30 is operated (closing operation) to close the special prize opening 30 (S2115). The special prize opening closure process (S2115) also sets the closure time for keeping the special prize opening 30 closed, i.e., the interval time. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a first interval time (e.g., approximately 3 to 5 seconds) and a second interval time (e.g., approximately 0.5 to 1 second) are provided as interval times, and the first interval time or second interval time is set depending on the type of jackpot game currently being played and the number of rounds in the completed round game (S2115).

Next, in S2116, it is determined whether the interval time has elapsed (S2116). If it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (it is during the interval period) (NO in S2116), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (YES in S2116), the round counter value is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether the round counter value is "0" (S2118). Then, if it is determined that the round counter value is not "0" (NO in S2118), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round counter value is "0" (YES in S2118), as a jackpot ending processing to end the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2119), the jackpot ending period is started (S2120), the jackpot ending flag is turned ON (S2121), and this processing is terminated. The round counter value will become "0" when all rounds of play in the jackpot game being executed have ended.

In S2119, an ending command is selected from a number of predetermined ending commands according to the game state at the time of the current jackpot, the type of the current jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, etc., and the selected command is set. The type of ending command set in this way determines the ending period (ending time) to be executed (set). The ending period is the period set after all opening operations of the large prize opening 30 during jackpot game have been completed and before the variable display of special symbols (effect symbols) can be executed. The ending period is also referred to as the "end period." During the ending period (end period), the large prize opening 30 is in a closed state. The effects executed during the ending period (end period) are also referred to as "ending effects" or "end effects." In this embodiment, the ending period is considered to be included in the special game state. Note that the ending period may not be included in the special game state.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sends the ending command set in S2119 to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing through output processing (S201). Then, upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 performs processing to execute a predetermined ending presentation based on the ending command.

If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), the final round of the jackpot game has ended, so it is determined whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed, i.e., whether the end timing of the ending period started in the processing of S2120 described above has arrived (S2122). As a result, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and the game status setting processing (S2124), described below, is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special symbol operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and this processing ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the above-mentioned special electric device processing (S1107), functions as a "special game execution means."

[Game Status Setting Processing]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game status setting process (S2124), first, it is determined whether the currently completed jackpot game is a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as mentioned above, three types of variable probability jackpots are defined: a 10R first jackpot, a 5R second jackpot, and a 10R fourth jackpot. Therefore, in S2201, it is determined whether the currently completed jackpot game corresponds to one of these three types. Then, if it is determined that the currently completed jackpot game is a variable probability jackpot (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), the variable probability counter is set to "10,000" (S2203), the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2204), and the time-saving counter is set to "10,000" (S2205), and the process ends.

The value set in the probability-change counter here is the number of times a high-probability special symbol hit/miss determination (in other words, a special symbol variable display) can be performed. In this embodiment, the value "10,000" (10,000 times) is set, taking into account the probability of a jackpot in a high-probability state, the gaming establishment's daily business hours, and the number of special symbol hit/miss determinations that can be performed during those business hours, and is essentially the same as guaranteeing a high-probability state until the next jackpot occurs or until business hours end. Therefore, when the gaming state is set to a high-probability state, it can be said that the high-probability state is guaranteed until the next jackpot occurs (which is essentially the same thing). Furthermore, when the probability-change flag is ON, the time-saving counter is also set to "10,000," so it can be said that a time-saving state (extended open state) is also set while this high-probability state is set. In other words, when the jackpot game related to the probability-change jackpot ends, the gaming state becomes a "high-probability high-base state" (second gaming state). As in this embodiment, the probability variable counter and time-saving counter may be set to a value of "10,000", effectively setting a high probability high base state until the next jackpot, or if the probability variable flag and time-saving flag are ON, control may be adopted such that a high probability high base state is set until the next jackpot occurs without setting a value in the counter.

On the other hand, if S2201 determines that the jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (NO in S2201), that is, if the jackpot game that ended this time was a non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot), the time-saving flag is turned ON without turning ON the probability variable flag (S2206), the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S2207), and processing ends. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the 5R third jackpot and the 10R fifth jackpot are considered non-probability variable jackpots (normal jackpots), so when jackpot game related to either of these two types ends, the game state becomes a "low-probability high base state" (first game state). The low-probability high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times (the special symbol hit/miss determination is performed 100 times), or the next jackpot occurs.

The time-saving counter and the probability change counter count the combined number of times the first special symbol has changed and the second special symbol has changed. Note that the values set (assigned) to the time-saving counter and the probability change counter are not limited to those in this embodiment, and can be determined arbitrarily taking into consideration the playability, ball-dispensing performance, specifications, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is also possible to set different values to each counter.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above game status setting process (S2124) functions as a "game status control means."

[Reserved ball processing]
As shown in FIG. 11 , the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball count process (S208) following the special symbol operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 35 , the reserved ball count process (S208) first reads the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2501). Next, command data containing information indicating the read reserved ball count (stored information) is generated as a reserved ball count command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). Reserved ball count commands are provided for the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols, respectively, and include the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command, the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command, and the regular symbol reserved ball count command. Either or both of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command are also referred to as the "special symbol reserved ball count command." The reserved ball count command (memorized information) set in S2502 is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt process (S105).

When the sub-controller 90 receives a reserved ball count command, it analyzes the received reserved ball count command to determine the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and regular symbol. If it determines that the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 has increased or decreased based on the received reserved ball count command, it updates the display content of the effect reserved display areas (first effect reserved display area 9c, second effect reserved display area 9d, variable effect reserved display area 9e) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 accordingly. Specifically, for example, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 increases by one from "3" to "4," a first effect reserved 9a corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, "4," is additionally displayed in the first effect reserved display area 9c. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 decreases by one from "2" to "1" (i.e., when the first special chart reserve is consumed), the first effect reserve 9a displayed at the left end of the first effect reserve display area 9c (the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 of "1", see Figure 3) is moved to the variable reserve display area 9e, and accordingly the first effect reserve 9a displayed in the first effect reserve display area 9c is moved (shifted) by one position to the left (in the direction of the reserve number decrease).

When the number of reserved balls for the special chart is added by the aforementioned S307 or S311, that is, when a starting ball is scored, the special chart reserved ball count command is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output process (S201) together with the special chart 1 starting ball command set in the aforementioned S323 (in the same interrupt) if the special chart reserved ball count command is a special chart 1 reserved ball count command (a command resulting from S311); if it is a special chart 2 reserved ball count command (a command resulting from S307), it is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output process (S201) together with the special chart 2 starting ball command set in the aforementioned S318 (in the same interrupt). This allows the sub-control unit 90 to receive the special chart reserved ball count command along with the starting ball score command, and to link the number of reserved balls for the special chart (stored information) included in the special chart reserved ball count command with the result of the preliminary determination (preliminary determination result information) included in the starting ball score command, for processing on the sub-control unit 90 side.

In addition, information indicating the number of special symbol reserved balls when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol has been added, i.e., information indicating the number of special symbol reserved balls associated with the start ball entry, may be included in the start ball entry command. In this case, there is no need to set a command for the number of reserved balls for the special symbol when the start ball has been entered, making it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main control unit 80 to the sub-control unit 90. In addition, information indicating the number of reserved balls for the special symbol when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol has been subtracted, i.e., information indicating the number of reserved balls for the special symbol associated with the start of the special symbol variation (special symbol reserved consumption), may be included in the variation start command. In this case, there is no need to set a command for the number of reserved balls for the special symbol associated with the start of the variation, making it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main control unit 80 to the sub-control unit 90. The same applies to normal symbols.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball count process (S208) followed by the power interruption monitoring process (S209). As shown in Fig. 36, in the power interruption monitoring process (S209), first, it determines whether or not a power interruption signal has been input (S2601). If no input is received (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if a power interruption signal has been input (YES in S2601), data regarding the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not the game is in a special mode, whether or not a winning game is in progress, the number of reserved balls, the number of remaining variations in the special mode and time-saving mode, etc.) is stored in RAM (S2602), the power interruption flag is set to ON (S2603), and then the process loops without returning to the interrupt process (S105).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance control means) (control processing by the sub-controller 90) will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 43. Note that counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-controller board 90 (sub-controller).

When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in Figure 37 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Upon power-on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90, and the performance control microcomputer 91 reads the sub-control main processing program from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 based on receiving the power-on command.

As shown in Figure 37, the sub-control main processing first performs CPU initialization processing (S4001). The CPU initialization processing (S4001) performs stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc., and resets various flags, statuses, and counters.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM (predetermined storage area) of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized and the process proceeds to S4004. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the power-off signal is ON but the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. However, if the power-off signal is ON due to a power outage or other reason but the contents of the RAM remain normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets various flags, status, and counter values.

In addition, the RAM (predetermined memory area) of the sub-control board 90 is also initialized when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is pressed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, i.e., when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed (when a RAM clear command is received). This initialization of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (RAM clear) corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing that initializes the stored contents of the predetermined memory area," and the performance control microcomputer 91 that executes the initialization of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (RAM clear) corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing execution means."

Note that steps S4001 through S4003 are executed only once after power is turned on (when power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. That is, as mentioned above, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 when power is turned on (a RAM clear command is also sent if the RAM clear switch is pressed), and the presentation control microcomputer 91 executes steps S4001 through S4003 upon receiving the power-on command (and RAM clear command). In this embodiment, the presentation control microcomputer 91 also performs processing similar to the power interruption monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11. When a power interruption signal is turned ON due to a power interruption or other reason, data related to presentation control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, data related to presentation control is backed up in the event of a power interruption or other power interruption. Therefore, when power is turned on after recovery from a power outage or other power outage (power recovery), unless the RAM on the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), the state of performance control by the performance control microcomputer 91 will return to the state it was in before the power outage.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining effects are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined update value memory area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining effects include a variable effect determination random number that determines the type of effect pattern game effect to be executed (variable effect pattern), a preview effect determination random number that determines preview effects, and a performance pattern determination random number that determines the performance pattern. The random numbers can be updated in the same way as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added by two instead of by one.

The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing can be, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) is sent from the main control board 80 notifying that a starting ball has been entered, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) is sent from the main control board 80 notifying the start of a fluctuation (starting fluctuation command), or when a fluctuation effect pattern, described below, is determined. The acquired random number for determining the effect is stored in a specified random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also called the "sub-output buffer") in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are sent to the control board that is the corresponding command destination, among the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command executes various effects (such as effect symbol game effects and special game effects) using various effect devices (such as the image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, and movable effect member 14) in accordance with the received command.

The presentation control microcomputer 91 then enables interrupts (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010). By executing these control processes, it is possible to control the display of images (display objects) on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (display presentation control), control the illumination of various lamps (light-emitting presentation control), control the operation of the movable presentation member 14 (movable presentation control), and control the sound output from the speaker 67 (sound presentation control), all as the game progresses.

[Receive interrupt processing]
38, in the reception interrupt process (S4008), it is determined (S4101) whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, i.e., whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 has been input to the external INT input section of the performance control microcomputer 91. If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), the various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and this processing ends. This reception interrupt processing (S4008) is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is executed each time a 2 ms interrupt pulse is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 39 , the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) first performs input processing (S4201) to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d. Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) outputs lamp data for illuminating various lamps (illumination components), such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and a drive data output process (S4203) outputs drive data for operating the movable effect component 14 (driving the drive means). The lamp data and drive data are generated in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (described below). Finally, a watchdog timer process (S4204) resets the watchdog timer.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a 10 ms interrupt pulse is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40 , the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) first performs a received command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later. Next, a switch status acquisition process (S4303) is performed to store the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process. Then, a switch process (S4304) is performed to set the display content of the display screen 7a based on the stored switch data. Other processes, such as creating lamp data for illuminating the illumination elements, creating drive data for operating the movable effect element 14 (driving the drive means), and updating the random number for effect determination, are then performed (S4305), and the process ends.

The drive data for the movable performance member 14 is created based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 (described below), or the operation pattern (movable performance pattern) of the movable performance member 14 included in the preview performance pattern set in S4506 (described below) if the preview performance pattern includes operation of the movable performance member 14 (movable performance). Furthermore, the lamp data for the movable lamp 15, which is one of the illumination members, is created based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 (described below), the operation pattern (movable performance pattern) of the movable performance member 14, etc.

[Received command analysis process]
41, in the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined (S4390) whether or not a start shot command has been received from the main control board 80. If it is determined that a start shot command has been received (YES in S4390), the processes of S4395 to S4400 are performed and the process proceeds to S4401. On the other hand, if it is determined that a start shot command has not been received (NO in S4390), the process proceeds to S4401 without performing the processes of S4395 to S4400.

The effect pending information storage process of S4395 stores information based on the start ball entry command (special chart 1 start ball entry command or special chart 2 start ball entry command) received in S4390 as effect pending information in a specified effect pending information storage area provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The effect pending information stored in the effect pending information storage area is used to execute various effects such as variable effects, preview effects, and effect modes, which will be described later.

As shown in Figure 67, the effect pending information storage area has first storage areas 1-4 corresponding to the first special symbol and second storage areas 1-4 corresponding to the second special symbol, and each storage area has an area for storing associated pre-determination result information that can be identified based on the start ball entry command (win/lose pre-determination result information, jackpot type pre-determination result information, and variation pattern pre-determination result information).

First memory areas 1-4 are set up according to the maximum number of reserved balls for Special Symbol 1 ("4" in this embodiment). When a Special Symbol 1 start ball entry command is received, information (command data) based on the received Special Symbol 1 start ball entry command is stored in order, starting with First Memory Area 1. Then, each time the display of the first special symbol begins to change (the first reserved special symbol is consumed), the information in First Memory Area 1 is deleted. At this time, if information is stored in First Memory Area 2, that information is shifted to First Memory Area 1; if information is stored in First Memory Area 3, that information is shifted to First Memory Area 2; and if information is stored in First Memory Area 4, that information is shifted to First Memory Area 3.

Second memory areas 1-4 are set up according to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 ("4" in this embodiment). When a special symbol 2 start ball entry command is received, information (command data) based on the received special symbol 2 start ball entry command is stored in order, starting with second memory area 1. Then, each time the variable display of the second special symbol begins (the second reserved special symbol is consumed), the information in second memory area 1 is deleted. At this time, if information is stored in second memory area 2, that information is shifted to second memory area 1; if information is stored in second memory area 3, that information is shifted to second memory area 2; and if information is stored in second memory area 4, that information is shifted to second memory area 3.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the effect hold information storage process (S4395), it checks whether there are any abnormalities (presence or absence of abnormalities) in the storage (storage contents) of the effect hold information caused by this process. Specifically, it checks whether there are any omissions in the storage of information based on the received start ball entry command (command omissions), whether there are any inconsistencies between the number of special balls in reserve that can be determined based on the special ball hold number command received along with the start ball entry command and the storage of the pre-determination result information (storage location, number of memories), whether there are any omissions in the special ball hold number command, etc.

For example, if the area storing new preliminary judgment result information based on the received start ball entry command is "first memory area 3," and the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 determined based on the reserved ball number command for special chart 1 received along with the start ball entry command is "3," then the storage of the preliminary judgment result information and the reserved ball number for special chart 1 are consistent, and it can be determined that the storage of the reserved effect information by this effect reservation information storage process (S4395) was performed normally (no abnormalities).

In contrast, if some or all of the pre-determination result information based on the start ball entry command is not stored in the corresponding memory area, for example, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 specified based on the reserved ball count command is "3" but no pre-determination result information is stored in the first memory area 3 (the first memory area 3 is empty), or when hit/miss pre-determination result information is stored in the first memory area 3 but no fluctuation pattern pre-determination result information is stored, or when fluctuation pattern pre-determination result information is stored but no hit/miss pre-determination result information is stored, it is possible that the start ball entry command was missed or the command was garbled, and it can be determined that the storage of the effect hold information by this effect hold information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally (there was an abnormality).

For example, if new pre-determination result information based on the received start ball entry command is stored but the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 at the time of storage cannot be determined, or if the area where the new pre-determination result information is stored does not match the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 determined based on the received number of reserved balls command for Special Chart 1 (for example, if the area where the new pre-determination result information is stored is "first memory area 3" and the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 determined is "2"), it is possible that the number of reserved balls command was missed or the command was corrupted, and it can be determined that the storage of the effect reserved information by this effect reserved information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally (there is an abnormality).

Furthermore, if the effect pending information storage process (S4395) has been performed (the start ball entry command has been received), but some or all of the new preliminary judgment result information based on the start ball entry command has not been stored in the corresponding memory area, and the number of special reserved balls cannot be identified, it is possible that both the start ball entry command and the reserved ball number command have been missed or the commands have been garbled, and it can be determined that the storage of the effect pending information by this effect pending information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally (there is an abnormality).

If the effect pending information storage process (S4395) confirms that there is an abnormality in the storage (stored contents) of the effect pending information by this process (YES in S4397), that is, if there is an abnormality in at least one of the start ball entry command (pre-determination result information) received in S4390 and the special chart pending ball count command (stored information) received along with the start ball entry command, the advance notice effect restriction flag is turned ON (S4399) and processing proceeds to S4400. On the other hand, if it confirms that there is no abnormality in the information stored by the effect pending information storage process (S4395) (NO in S4397), processing proceeds to S4400 without performing processing of S4399.

Here, the preview performance restriction flag is a flag for restricting the execution of performance information stored in the performance pending information storage area, i.e., performances (preview performances, etc.) based on preliminary determination result information. When the preview performance restriction flag is OFF, the execution of performances based on preliminary determination result information is permitted (performances based on preliminary determination result information can be executed), and when it is ON, the execution of performances based on preliminary determination result information is restricted (prohibited) (performances based on preliminary determination result information cannot be executed).

If an effect based on pre-determination result information is performed in a situation where an abnormality is found in the information stored by the effect pending information storage process (S4395), there is a risk that an error (false information) will occur in the effect content, causing misunderstanding to the player. In this regard, in this embodiment, if an abnormality is found in the information stored by the effect pending information storage process (S4395), the execution of an effect based on pre-determination result information is restricted, making it possible to prevent an effect that could mislead the player (an effect based on false information) from being performed. This makes it possible to avoid a loss of reliability in the effect and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, after the preview effect restriction flag is set to ON, that state (preview effect restriction state) is maintained until a predetermined restriction release condition is met. Once the restriction release condition is met, the preview effect restriction flag is set to OFF, allowing (enabling) the execution of effects based on the preliminary determination result information. Specifically, after the preview effect restriction flag is set to ON, if no abnormalities are found in the storage of the effect pending information based on the reception of the start ball entry command (the storage of the effect pending information is performed normally) continues until the start ball entry command is received a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) (i.e., until the variable display of special symbols based on a new start ball entry is performed a predetermined number of times), or if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted, the restriction release condition is met and the preview effect restriction flag is set to OFF. In other words, the restriction release condition is set to be either no abnormalities are found in the storage of the effect pending information until the start ball entry command is received a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times), or the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. The restriction release conditions are not limited to this, and may be, for example, that all special symbol reserves stored when an abnormality is found in the storage of effect reserve information (when the advance effect restriction flag is turned ON) are consumed, or that the number of special symbol variable displays equivalent to the number of special symbol reserves (number of special symbol reserve balls) stored when an abnormality is found in the storage of effect reserve information + α (α = 1 or more) is executed.

The contents stored in the effect hold information storage area (effect hold information) do not contradict the contents stored in the special symbol hold memory section (first special symbol hold memory section, second special symbol hold memory section) of the main control board 80 (acquired information, hold information), and the meanings of both are the same. For this reason, the effect hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be considered an "acquired information storage means" or a "hold memory means."

The effect pending information is also referred to as "pre-reading information," the special chart 1 effect pending information is also referred to as "first pre-reading information," and the special chart 2 effect pending information is also referred to as "second pre-reading information." The effect pending information storage area is also referred to as "pre-reading information storage means," the special chart 1 effect pending information storage area is also referred to as "first pre-reading information storage means," and the special chart 2 effect pending information storage area is also referred to as "second pre-reading information storage means."

The hold icon notification process of S4400 is a process related to the hold icon notification, which is a type of notification effect based on the hold effect information (preliminary judgment result information) stored in S4395. The hold icon notification is an effect in which the display mode of the hold effect (hold icon) displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed in a different display mode (also called the "notification display mode") from the normal mode, and the notification display mode suggests the possibility (expectation level) of a jackpot. The hold icon notification is also called a "hold change notification" or "specific effect." The hold icon notification is a type of display effect performed on the display screen 7a. The hold icon notification process (S4400) will be described later.

In S4401, it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the fluctuation performance start process (S4402) described below is performed and processing proceeds to S4403. If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), processing proceeds to S4403 without performing processing of S4402.

In S4403, it is determined whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation effect end process is performed to stop the display of the effect symbol and end the fluctuation effect (S4404). In the fluctuation effect end process (S4404), a fluctuation effect end command is set in the sub-output buffer to stop the display of effect symbol 8 and end the fluctuation effect. When the set fluctuation effect end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops the display of the effect symbol 8 that was being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (confirmed stop), and ends the fluctuation effect (effect symbol game effect). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4403 that a fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing S4404.

The sub-controller 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), which executes the variable effect start process (S4402) and the variable effect end process (S4404), also functions as a "variable game execution means." Note that variable effects refer to various effects that are performed in accordance with variable play from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to its end (stop display), such as the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and the reach effect described below. The variable effects performed on the display screen 7a are a type of display effect.

In S4405, it is determined whether a jackpot game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). Jackpot game-related commands are commands transmitted from the main control board 80 when a jackpot game is executed. Specifically, these include an opening command (see S2010) transmitted at the start of a jackpot game (occurrence of a jackpot), a round start command (see S2107) transmitted at the start of a round, a round end command (see S2114) transmitted at the end of a round, and an ending command (see S2119) transmitted at the end of a jackpot game. In S4405, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game-related commands have been received. If not (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407. If received (YES in S4405), jackpot game-related effect processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the type of command received (S4406).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. If the received command is a round start command, a round effect command that specifies a round effect corresponding to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. If the received command is an ending command, an ending effect command that specifies an ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. When these various jackpot-related effect commands are sent to the image control board 100 via the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 executes jackpot-related effects such as opening effects, round effects, and ending effects on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game. The jackpot game effects (jackpot game-related effects) displayed on the display screen 7a are a type of display effect.

Finally, S4407 is processed, and this process ends. In S4407, other processes are performed, such as processes based on received commands other than the various commands mentioned above (for example, a normal symbol change start command or a normal symbol change stop command).

[Variable performance start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the variable effect start process (S4402), first, a random number process for determining effect is performed (S4501) to acquire various random numbers for determining effect, such as a random number for determining variable effect, a random number for determining preview effect, and a random number for determining effect pattern. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when a variable effect start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect pattern game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the effect pattern to be stopped and displayed, whether or not to execute preview effect, and the mode of preview effect if preview effect is executed are determined.

Next, in S4502, the variation start command received in S4401 is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process for the first or second special symbol. The information designating the variation pattern includes information indicating the type of variation pattern (P1-P18) (see Figures 9A and 9B), game status information designating the current game state, the results of the first or second special symbol hit/miss determination, and symbol information designating the type of jackpot (see Figure 8). Furthermore, since there are variation pattern designation commands corresponding to the first and second special symbols, analyzing the variation pattern designation command makes it possible to determine whether the currently starting effect pattern game effect (the variation display of the effect pattern) is related to Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2. Note that the variation pattern information, game status information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in processes other than the variation effect start process executed subsequently.

Next, in S4503, the current mode status is referenced (S4503). The mode status is used to determine the presentation mode to be executed. The mode status is a value between "1" and "5", and each value is assigned to presentation modes A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to presentation mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to presentation mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to presentation mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to presentation mode D, and mode status "5" corresponds to presentation mode E. By referencing the current mode status, it is possible to identify the current presentation mode.

Here, the presentation mode refers to the presentation format (presentation environment) when variable play is being executed (variable play state), and when the presentation mode changes, some or all of the presentation aspects of various display effects such as the background of the display screen 7a and variable effects, reach effects, and preview effects will differ. Specifically, some or all of the presentation images (presentation displays) displayed on the image display device 7 will differ depending on the presentation mode, such as different display aspects of the presentation symbols 8 (e.g., symbol design, number design, etc.), or different characters, items, and background images that appear. In addition, presentation symbol game effects and jackpot game effects can also be executed in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode, and when multiple game effects (preview effects, reach effects, round effects, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the presentation mode. The presentation mode is also referred to as a "variable mode."

In this embodiment, presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be executed when the gaming state is a low-probability, low-base state; presentation mode C is a presentation mode that can be executed when the gaming state is a low-probability, high-base state; presentation mode D is a presentation mode that can be executed when the gaming state is a high-probability, high-base state; and presentation mode E is a presentation mode that can be executed in both a low-probability, high-base state, and a high-probability, high-base state. Therefore, when the presentation mode is any of "A" through "D," a player can determine whether the current gaming state is a low-probability, low-base state, a low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state), or a high-probability, high-base state (high probability gaming state) by checking the presentation mode. On the other hand, when the presentation mode is "E," it is difficult (impossible) for a player to determine (distinguish) whether the current gaming state is a low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state) or a high-probability, high-base state (high probability gaming state) by checking the presentation mode. In that sense, presentation mode E can be called a "game status non-announcement mode."

Returning to Figure 42, next in S4504, a variable presentation pattern determination table (not shown) is set to determine the execution pattern (also called the "variable presentation pattern") of the variable presentation using presentation symbols, etc. based on the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination (S4504). Specifically, the variable presentation pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 and the variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)" (see Figure 9A), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the current presentation mode is set as the fluctuation presentation pattern determination table. In this embodiment, multiple fluctuation presentation pattern determination tables corresponding to presentation modes (mode status) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and in S4504, from among these fluctuation presentation pattern determination tables, a table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set.

The variable presentation pattern determination table is primarily used to determine the execution mode of the presentation symbol game presentation (such as the variation mode of the presentation symbol), and multiple variable presentation pattern determination tables corresponding to the presentation mode (mode status) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In S4504, from among these variable presentation pattern determination tables, a table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set.

Next, in S4505, a variation effect pattern that matches the specified variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) is determined (selected) and set (S4505) based on the variation effect determination random number obtained in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504. Because the special symbol variation pattern stipulates the variation time of the special symbol, i.e., the execution time of the variation game (see Figures 9A and 9B), the execution time (execution period) of the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 will conform to the special symbol variation pattern. Furthermore, because the special symbol variation pattern also stipulates the content of the variation effect (see Figures 9A and 9B), the content (execution mode) of the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 will conform to the special symbol variation pattern.

The variable presentation pattern mainly sets the variable mode of the presentation symbol 8 displayed in the presentation symbol display area 7b (the execution mode of the presentation symbol game presentation). This determines the detailed execution mode of the presentation, such as whether or not a reach presentation will be executed in the presentation symbol game presentation (variable presentation). A variable presentation that executes (or includes) a reach presentation is also called a "variable presentation with reach," and a variable presentation that does not execute (or does not include) a reach presentation is also called a "variable presentation without reach."

A reach effect is, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination indicates a jackpot, the display mode of the effect symbols 8 is set to a mode in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (double numbers) (winning symbol arrangement, specific mode). Two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (e.g., the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R) are displayed (temporarily) as symbols that make up the winning symbol arrangement (specific mode) (also called "reach symbol" or "reach mode"), and the remaining symbol (e.g., the center effect symbol 8C) continues to display in a variable manner (also called a "reach state"), indicating whether the remaining effect symbol will be displayed as a symbol that completes the winning symbol arrangement. This reach effect effectively builds anticipation in players aiming for a jackpot. The reach effect displayed on the display screen 7a is a type of display effect.

The variable performance pattern includes not only the variable mode of the performance symbol 8, but also the execution modes (performance patterns) of display performance, sound performance, light-emitting performance, moving performance, etc. that are executed in conjunction with the variable display of the performance symbol 8, and it is also determined whether or not these performances are executed (S4505). For this reason, the display performance, sound performance, light-emitting performance, moving performance, etc. that are executed in conjunction with the variable performance can be referred to as variable performance. In other words, in S4505, various performance modes related to the variable performance, including the variable mode of the performance symbol 8, are determined based on the results of the special pattern hit/miss determination (performance mode determination means).

In addition, in S4505, the effect pattern 8 to be displayed as stopped (also called the "stop effect pattern") is determined and set based on the effect pattern determination random number obtained in S4501 and a stop pattern determination table (not shown). The stop effect pattern comprises the reach pattern, winning pattern arrangement (winning pattern), and losing pattern arrangement (losing pattern) of the effect pattern 8. There are two types of stop displays: a confirmed stop display (also simply called a "confirmed stop") that definitely displays the effect pattern 8 as stopped, and a provisional stop display (also simply called a "provisional stop") that appears before the effect pattern 8 is definitely displayed as stopped.

A temporary stop means that the changing display (e.g., scrolling display) of the effect pattern 8 is temporarily stopped (paused), and the effect pattern 8 is temporarily displayed stopped at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a. The temporarily stopped effect pattern can be displayed in a slightly moving state or in a still state. The stopped display of each pattern when the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the order of the first stop pattern, the second stop pattern, and the third stop pattern before the end of the changing display also falls under the category of a temporary stop. On the other hand, a fixed stop means that the changing display of the effect pattern 8 ends, and the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a completely still state at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a (e.g., the effect pattern display area 7b). When the effect pattern 8 is fixedly stopped after the changing display, the display result of the changing display (the result of the changing display) is fixedly displayed (fixed display) (derived display). In other words, the effect pattern 8 is fixedly stopped upon the end of the changing display of the special pattern (i.e., the fixed display of the special pattern). Therefore, the temporary stopping of the effect symbol 8 can be performed once or multiple times until it is finally stopped.

The stop effect symbols determined (selected) in S4505 are symbols that temporarily stop (also called "temporary stop symbols") and symbols that will definitely stop (also called "fixed stop symbols"). For example, the effect symbol 8 that is displayed as a stop (fixed stop) as a result of the variable effect, i.e., the fixed stop symbol, will be a variance such as "787" (also called a "reach miss symbol" or "reach symbol arrangement") if the result of the special symbol hit/miss is a reach miss, and if it is a reach miss, it will be a variance such as "635" or "655" (also called a "complete variance symbol" or "non-reach symbol arrangement") if it is a reach miss.

Also, in a low-probability, low-base state, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (first special pattern hit/miss judgment) is a jackpot and the jackpot is a 5R jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stopping pattern of performance pattern 8 will be a double-digit number pattern other than "777", and if it is a 10R 1st jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stopping pattern of performance pattern 8 will be a double-digit number pattern other than "777". On the other hand, in a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (second special pattern hit/miss judgment) is a jackpot and the jackpot is a 10R 9th jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stopping pattern of performance pattern 8 will be a double-digit number pattern other than "777" (winning pattern arrangement), and if it is a 10R 8th jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stopping pattern of performance pattern 8 will be a double-digit number pattern other than "777". In this way, the double number "777" is a guaranteed result for a 10R jackpot, which is the most advantageous jackpot for players.

In addition, in a low-probability, low-base state, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (first special symbol hit/miss judgment) is a jackpot, and that jackpot is any of the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots (special jackpot), the confirmed stopping pattern of performance symbol 8 will be a specific variance pattern among the variance patterns. This specific variance pattern notifies the winning (occurrence) of a special jackpot by a pattern arrangement similar to a losing pattern arrangement, and is a type of winning pattern arrangement (special display mode). A specific variance pattern is also called a "special pattern arrangement."

Specific variations (special symbol arrangements) can be formed by a pattern arrangement with some kind of rule, such as variations made up of consecutive numbers such as "123" or "567," or variations made up of three non-identical red symbols (3, 7) such as "373" or "773." They can also be formed by a pattern arrangement in which at least one of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the middle performance symbol 8C) is a symbol that is not normally displayed.

The stop display mode (symbol arrangement) of the effect symbols 8 described above is just one example, and what is displayed as the stop effect symbol can be changed as appropriate. The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol determined in S4505 may either constitute the same stop display mode or different stop display modes. If the temporary stop symbol is different from the final stop symbol, the effect symbols can be configured to change again after the temporary stop (re-change display, re-change effect), etc., before finally stopping and displaying the final stop symbol. In one special symbol change display (from the start of change to the final stop), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed and then temporarily stopped, and then the change display is resumed. This effect, which gives the appearance of multiple change displays (change effects) of the effect symbols, is also called a "pseudo consecutive effect," or simply "pseudo consecutive effects."

In addition, in S4505, the determination pattern 8s (also referred to as the "stop determination pattern") to be displayed in the determination pattern display area 7c is determined and set. The only type of stop display for the determination pattern 8s is a confirmed stop display (confirmed stop). As mentioned above, the determination pattern 8s changes and changes in synchronization with the changing display of the special pattern, and stops and changes in synchronization with the stopped display of the special pattern, and mainly functions as a pattern indicating the changing status of the special pattern. For this reason, the stop determination pattern set in S4505 is a confirmed stop pattern (confirmed stop pattern). In this embodiment, the confirmed stop pattern for the determination pattern 8s is set to a confirmed stop pattern with the same pattern (number pattern) arrangement as the confirmed stop pattern for the effect pattern 8. Note that at least the loss pattern arrangement (confirmed loss stop pattern) of the confirmed stop patterns for the determination pattern 8s may be a common pattern arrangement (one type) regardless of the loss pattern arrangement (confirmed loss stop pattern) of the effect pattern 8.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with multiple modes (variation presentation patterns) for the variation of the presentation symbol 8, such as normal reach presentation and super reach presentation. In S4505, it is determined which of these presentations will be performed, or whether none of these presentations will be performed (this is also referred to as "normal variation"), based on the variation presentation pattern determination table. Below, normal reach may be referred to as "NM reach," and super reach may be referred to as "SP reach."

For example, when a reach variable effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variable pattern designation command and the variable effect pattern determination table. Here, when an SP reach effect is executed, it is set so that the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot is higher than when an NM reach effect is executed. In other words, it can be said that the SP reach effect is a game effect with a higher possibility (expectation) of a jackpot compared to an NM reach effect.

In this embodiment, when the sub-control board 90 receives a fluctuation pattern specification command from the main control board 80 that specifies a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms (30 seconds) or more (see Figures 9A and 9B), a reach effect (fluctuation effect with reach) is set (executed) based on that command. If the fluctuation time is 30,000 ms (30 seconds), an NM reach effect is set (executed) as the reach effect, and if the fluctuation time is 45,000 ms (45 seconds) or more, an SP reach effect is set (executed) as the reach effect. A fluctuation effect in which an NM reach effect is executed without an SP reach effect (excluding an SP reach effect) is also referred to as an "NM reach fluctuation effect," a fluctuation effect in which an SP reach effect is executed (including an SP reach effect) is also referred to as an "SP reach fluctuation effect," and NM reach fluctuation effects and SP reach fluctuation effects are collectively referred to as "reach fluctuation effects."

Here, the change display (change display) of the effect symbol 8 is basically performed as follows. First, a special symbol hit/miss determination is made and the change display of the special symbol begins, and the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R also begin to change accordingly. Then, the change speed of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes high and approximately constant), and after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, the change speed of the first stopping symbol (in this embodiment, left effect symbol 8L) slows down (decelerates) and the first stopping symbol stops (temporarily stops). Next, the change speed of the second stopping symbol (in this embodiment, right effect symbol 8R) slows down (decelerates) and the second stopping symbol stops (temporarily stops), and finally the change speed of the third stopping symbol (in this embodiment, center effect symbol 8C) slows down (decelerates) and the third stopping symbol stops (temporarily stops). After this, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped, and are displayed as either a losing or winning symbol arrangement, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, and this marks the end of one variable display. Normal variations and reach effects, etc. are carried out based on this flow from the start to the end of the variable display.

Specifically, for example, when the function to shorten the time for special symbol fluctuations based on the number of reserved balls and game status is not activated (when the function is not activated), if the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate, the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) will stop (temporarily stop) after a predetermined time (e.g., 9 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuations, followed by the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol). If the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stop) with the same numerical pattern (reach mode), a reach is established, and then a reach effect (NM reach effect or SP reach effect) is executed (e.g., fluctuation patterns P1 to P7). In the case of an SP reach effect (e.g., fluctuation patterns P1 to P6), the NM reach effect is followed by the SP reach effect (the NM reach effect develops into the SP reach effect). When a reach effect is executed, the reach effect is followed by the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed in either a losing symbol arrangement or a winning symbol arrangement.

On the other hand, if a reach is not achieved when the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stop) (for example, variation pattern P8), the variation is considered to be a normal variation, and the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) stops (temporarily stop), followed by the middle effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol). In this example, in a normal variation, the time it takes from the start of the variation of the effect symbol 8 to the third stop symbol (middle effect symbol 8C in this example) stopping (temporarily stop) is approximately 11 seconds. However, in normal fluctuations when the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated (for example, fluctuation patterns P9, P10, P18), the time it takes from the start of fluctuation until the left performance symbol 8L (first stopping symbol) stops (temporarily stops) is shorter than normal (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated), and accordingly, the time it takes for the right performance symbol 8R (second stopping symbol) and center performance symbol 8C (third stopping symbol) to stop (temporarily stop) is also shorter.

In addition, depending on the variable presentation pattern set in S4505 and the preview presentation pattern set in S4506 (described below), the order and timing of the display of the stopped presentation patterns may differ from the above-mentioned manner, for example, after the display of the changing presentation pattern 8 begins, the three presentation patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may all stop (temporarily stop) at the same time, or all patterns may continue to change even after the specified time (for example, 9 seconds) until the first stopped pattern stops has passed.

In this embodiment, the variation effect patterns that can be set in S4505 correspond to the special chart variation patterns. For example, if the special chart variation pattern to be executed is variation pattern P1, a variation effect pattern for a jackpot, including SP reach effect A, is set (see Figure 9A).

In this embodiment, multiple reach effects (reach effect patterns) are provided, and one of the reach effect patterns is set depending on the variable time (variation pattern of 30,000 ms or more) at which the reach effect can be executed (S4505). Normal reach, SP reach A, and SP reach B are provided as reach effects that can be executed in non-time-saving mode. Of these, normal reach corresponds to a miss (variation pattern P7), while SP reach A and B correspond to either a jackpot (variation patterns P1, P2, P3) or a miss (variation patterns P4, P5, P6) (see Figure 9A). Meanwhile, normal reach, SP reach C, and SP reach D are provided as reach effects that can be executed in time-saving mode. All of these correspond to either a jackpot (variation patterns P11, 12, 13) or a miss (variation patterns P14, 15, 16) (see Figure 9B). The reason why a normal reach for a jackpot (normal reach jackpot) is set up during time-saving mode is to allow for efficient use of not only miss fluctuations but also jackpot fluctuations.

SP Reach A-D each have multiple presentation patterns (execution modes of the SP Reach presentation) with different content for the SP Reach presentation (development presentation). For example, there are three types of SP Reach A: a first SP Reach A in which the character appearing in the SP Reach presentation is character A1 (first character) and the story (plot) of the SP Reach presentation is story A1 (first story); a second SP Reach A in which the character appearing in the SP Reach presentation is character A2 (second character) and the story (plot) of the SP Reach presentation is story A2 (second story); and a third SP Reach A in which the character appearing in the SP Reach presentation is character A3 (third character) and the story (plot) of the SP Reach presentation is story A3 (third story).

For this reason, when a command specifying variation pattern P1 is received from the main control board 80 as a variation pattern designation command, in S4505, one of the first SP reach A, second SP reach A, or third SP reach A is selected and set as the SP reach A based on a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown). In other words, the variation effect (reach variation effect) accompanying the variable display of the special symbol based on variation pattern P1 may be executed in a manner that results in a jackpot via the first SP reach A, a jackpot via the second SP reach A, or a jackpot via the third SP reach A. Furthermore, when a command specifying variation pattern P4 is received from the main control board 80 as a variation pattern designation command, in S4505, one of the first SP reach A, second SP reach A, or third SP reach A is selected and set as the SP reach A based on a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown). In other words, the variation effect (reach variation effect) that accompanies the variation display of the special symbol based on variation pattern P4 may be executed in a manner that results in a miss after passing through the first SP reach A, a miss after passing through the second SP reach A, or a miss after passing through the third SP reach A. The same applies to other SP reaches and variation patterns.

In this way, in this embodiment, for special chart fluctuation patterns (predetermined fluctuation patterns) with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms or more, multiple SP reach presentation patterns (execution modes) are provided that can be executed for a single special chart fluctuation pattern. This makes it possible to diversify the fluctuation presentations, including SP reach presentations (SP reach fluctuation presentations), and enhance the presentation effects of the fluctuation presentations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, with regard to SP Reach B, there are cases where SP Reach B is executed via a pseudo-consecutive hit (variation patterns P2, P5), and cases where SP Reach B is executed without a pseudo-consecutive hit (variation patterns P3, P6) (see Figure 9A). In other words, there are presentation patterns for SP Reach B that go via a pseudo-consecutive hit (also called "pseudo-consecutive SP Reach B"), and presentation patterns for SP Reach B that do not go via a pseudo-consecutive hit (also called "non-pseudo-consecutive SP Reach B"). This prevents the presentation from becoming uniform, and makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect. Note that the combination of pseudo-consecutive hits and reach hits can also be applied to presentation patterns other than SP Reach B.

The selection rates of the SP Reach A presentation patterns determined by the variation presentation pattern determination table can be configured so that, for example, for variation pattern P1 (jackpot variation), the selection rates increase in the order of 3rd SP Reach A, 2nd SP Reach A, and 1st SP Reach A; and for variation pattern P4 (miss variation), the selection rates increase in the order of 1st SP Reach A, 2nd SP Reach A, and 3rd SP Reach A. This allows the expected level to be highest when the 1st SP Reach A is executed among the SP Reach As, followed by the 2nd SP Reach A and the 3rd SP Reach A, in that order. This configuration regarding the types of SP Reach and their selection rates also applies to SP Reach B to D. The types of SP Reach (SP Reach types) and the number of presentations are not limited to those shown in this embodiment and can be changed as appropriate depending on the playability and specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 56 (1) to (5), with regard to SP Reach A to D, while the SP Reach effect (SP Reach variation effect) is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a branch point (also called "win/lose branch timing") is provided at the end of the effect that leads to the notification of a jackpot or loss, and after the win/lose branch timing, a performance that notifies of a jackpot or loss (also called "win/lose notification effect") is executed. Then, after the win/lose notification effect is executed, the performance pattern 8 is displayed stopped in a specific pattern (for example, a double number) or a non-specific pattern (for example, a random number), and the variation effect ends.

When the first effect button detection switch 63c or the second effect button detection switch 63d detects that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b has been operated at the win/loss branching timing, a win/loss notification effect is executed as an effect corresponding to that operation (operation-responsive effect). Win/loss notification effects include an effect that notifies of a jackpot (also called a "win notification effect") and an effect that notifies of a loss (also called a "loss notification effect").

A change effect in which one of SP Reach A to D is executed (SP Reach change effect) is also a change effect that includes operation of the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (also called an "operation change effect").

At the timing of the win/lose branch, an effect (also called the "first operation instruction effect") instructing the player to operate the first effect button 63a (also called the "first predetermined operation") may be executed (see Figure 56 (2)), or an effect (also called the "second operation instruction effect") instructing the player to operate the second effect button 63b (also called the "second predetermined operation") may be executed (see Figure 56 (3)).

In this embodiment, the first operation instruction effect is performed by displaying on the display screen 7a an effect image (also referred to as the "first operation instruction image") that includes an image imitating the first effect button 63a (also referred to as the "first button image") and an image indicating the operation acceptance period (also referred to as the "gauge image") (first operation instruction effect execution means). Furthermore, the second operation instruction effect is performed by displaying on the display screen 7a an effect image (also referred to as the "second operation instruction image") that includes an image imitating the second effect button 63b (also referred to as the "second button image") and an image indicating the operation acceptance period (gauge image) (second operation instruction effect execution means). Either or both of the first button image and the second button image are referred to as "button images," either or both of the first operation instruction image and the second operation instruction image are referred to as "operation instruction images," and either or both of the first operation instruction effect and the second operation instruction effect are referred to as "operation instruction effect."

When the first operation instruction effect or the second operation instruction effect is executed and the corresponding effect button detection switch (first effect button detection switch 63c or second effect button detection switch 63d) detects that the effect button corresponding to the operation instruction effect (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) has been operated within the specified operation acceptance period, a win notification effect or a loss notification effect is executed. In this embodiment, the win notification effect is an effect image displayed on the display screen 7a showing that a character appearing in the SP reach effect has succeeded in a specified mission (game, battle, etc.) (see Figure 56 (4)), and the loss notification effect is an effect image displayed on the display screen 7a showing that a character appearing in the SP reach effect has failed in a specified mission (game, battle, etc.) (see Figure 56 (5)).

In addition, if the first operation instruction effect or the second operation instruction effect is executed and the effect button corresponding to the operation instruction effect (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) is not operated within the specified operation acceptance period, and the operation acceptance period has passed, the winning/losing notification effect (winning/losing notification effect or losing notification effect) will also be executed. In other words, if the first operation instruction effect or the second operation instruction effect is executed and the effect button corresponding to the operation instruction effect is not operated within the operation acceptance period, the winning/losing notification effect will be automatically executed. This means that the winning/losing notification effect will be executed even if a malfunction occurs in the effect button or effect button detection switch and the effect button does not function, preventing the effect of the effect from being impaired.

The type of effect button that the player operates at the win/loss branching timing, i.e., the type of operation instruction effect to be executed at the win/loss branching timing, is determined when the SP reach variation effect is set in S4505, and is set together with the effect pattern of the SP reach variation effect. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the type of operation instruction effect to be executed at the win/loss branching timing based on, for example, the operation instruction effect determination table shown in Figure 48, and sets this (S4505). Note that the table shown in the same figure is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 48, the operation instruction effect determination table in this embodiment is configured by assigning operation instruction effect determination random number values to a "first operation instruction effect" and a "second operation instruction effect" for each of the cases where the SP reach variation effect set in S4505, i.e., the current SP reach variation effect that is about to begin, is related to a special jackpot (special jackpot variation), is related to a non-special jackpot (non-special jackpot variation), or is related to a miss (miss variation). The operation instruction effect determination random number is a type of effect determination random number obtained in S4501 described above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 99," for example.

Note that the parentheses such as (30/100) below the assigned random number values in the table shown in Figure 48 indicate the selection rate (selection ratio, determination ratio) within the table. This also applies to the various tables described below with reference to the drawings.

For example, if the random number value for determining the operation instruction effect obtained in S4501 is "50", if the current SP reach variation effect is a guaranteed jackpot variation, it will be determined to be the second operation instruction effect, and if it is a non-guaranteed jackpot variation or a miss variation, it will be determined to be the first operation instruction effect.

The result of the operation instruction presentation decision, i.e., the type of operation instruction presentation to be executed at the win/lose branching timing (first operation instruction presentation or second operation instruction presentation), is included in the variable presentation pattern and is included in the variable presentation start command described below and sent to the image control board 100.

Then, if the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation instruction performance to be executed at the win/lose branch timing is the first operation instruction performance, it turns on a first operation instruction performance flag (not shown), and if it determines that the second operation instruction performance is the second operation instruction performance, it turns on a second operation instruction performance flag (not shown).

When the first operation instruction effect flag is ON, it indicates that the first operation instruction effect will be executed at the win/lose branching timing, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the first operation instruction effect will not be executed at the win/lose branching timing. After the first operation instruction effect flag is turned ON, it turns OFF when the first operation instruction effect is executed and the first effect button 63a is operated within the specified operation acceptance period (the first effect button detection switch 63c detects the operation of the first effect button 63a), or when the operation acceptance period elapses without any operation.

When the second operation instruction effect flag is ON, it indicates that the second operation instruction effect will be executed at the win/lose branching timing, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the second operation instruction effect will not be executed at the win/lose branching timing. After the second operation instruction effect flag is turned ON, it turns OFF when the second operation instruction effect is executed and the second effect button 63b is operated within the specified operation acceptance period (the second effect button detection switch 63d detects the operation of the second effect button 63b), or when the operation acceptance period elapses without any operation.

In this embodiment, when the first operation instruction effect flag is ON, i.e., when the first operation instruction effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch of the SP reach fluctuation effect (see Figure 56 (2)), during the execution period of the fluctuation effect (fluctuation period), at least from the start of the SP reach effect to the end of the win/loss notification effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 does not make any decisions regarding the execution of the second operation instruction effect or an effect using the second effect button 63b (also referred to as the "second operation effect"), thereby preventing the second operation instruction effect from being executed. In other words, during the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation effect in which the first operation instruction effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch, the execution of the second operation instruction effect is restricted during the predetermined period before the first operation instruction effect is executed (pre-execution predetermined period), the period in which the first operation instruction effect is executed, and the predetermined period after the first operation instruction effect is executed (post-execution predetermined period).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the second operation instruction effect flag is ON, i.e., when the second operation instruction effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch of the SP reach fluctuation effect (see Figure 56 (3)), during the execution period of the fluctuation effect (fluctuation period), at least from the start of the SP reach effect to the end of the win/loss notification effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 does not make any decisions regarding the execution of the first operation instruction effect or the effect using the first effect button 63a (also referred to as the "first operation effect"), thereby preventing the first operation instruction effect from being executed. In other words, during the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation effect in which the second operation instruction effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch, the execution of the first operation instruction effect is restricted during the predetermined period before the second operation instruction effect is executed (pre-execution predetermined period), the period in which the second operation instruction effect is executed, and the predetermined period after the second operation instruction effect is executed (post-execution predetermined period).

In this way, by restricting the execution of the second operation instruction effect when the first operation instruction effect flag is ON, or restricting the execution of the first operation instruction effect when the second operation instruction effect flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first operation instruction effect (i.e., the operation of the first effect button 63a) and the execution of the second operation instruction effect (i.e., the operation of the second effect button 63a) from being close to each other in one variable effect, and to avoid the hassle of operating the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b within a short period of time. This makes it less likely that the effects of operating the first effect button 63a (first predetermined operation) and the second effect button 63b (second predetermined operation) will be impaired, making it easier for the player to experience the effects of each operation.

According to the operation instruction effect determination table of this embodiment, the rate at which the operation instruction effect to be executed at the win/loss branch timing is determined to be the first operation instruction effect (the rate at which the first operation instruction effect is executed) is highest when the current SP reach variation effect is a miss variation, and the rates decrease in the order of non-probability variable jackpot variation and probability variable jackpot variation. On the other hand, the rate at which the operation instruction effect to be executed at the win/loss branch timing is determined to be the second operation instruction effect (the rate at which the second operation instruction effect is executed) is highest when the current SP reach variation effect is a probability variable jackpot variation, and the rates decrease in the order of non-probability variable jackpot variation and miss variation. For this reason, for the player, the probability of a probability variable jackpot increases when the second operation instruction effect is executed at the win/loss branch timing, and the probability of a probability variable jackpot decreases when the first operation instruction effect is executed at the win/loss branch timing. Furthermore, if the first operation instruction effect is executed at the timing of the win/lose branch, the player will have the expectation of a non-variable jackpot, but will feel that the possibility of a miss is higher.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, which determines the operation instruction display at the win/loss branch timing in the above manner, is configured so that the likelihood of transitioning to a high-probability state (second gaming state) after a jackpot game is higher when a win notification display is executed based on operation of the second display button 63b at the win/loss branch timing of the SP reach variation display and the display symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner after the first operation instruction display is executed at the win/loss branch timing of the SP reach variation display and the display symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner after the first operation instruction display is executed at the win/loss branch timing of the SP reach variation display and the display symbol 8 (identification information) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner after the second operation instruction display is executed at ... In other words, the operation instruction effect functions as an effect that suggests the possibility of transitioning to a high probability state (also known as "probability change expectation"). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the operation instruction effect that is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch, and increase the player's enjoyment of the game.

In addition, it may be possible to make it more likely that a transition to a high probability state (second gaming state) will occur after a jackpot is achieved if the first operation instruction effect is executed at the timing when the SP reach variation effect branches off and the performance symbol 8 (special symbol) is displayed stopped in a specific manner, rather than if the second operation instruction effect is executed at the timing when the SP reach variation effect branches off and the performance symbol 8 (special symbol) is displayed stopped in a specific manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at the timing of the win/lose branch, there are cases where a first operation instruction effect is executed instructing the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and cases where a second operation instruction effect is executed instructing the player to operate the second effect button 63b. However, the content of the operation instruction is not limited to this. For example, if there are multiple types of operation (operation methods) for a single effect button, the instruction may be to instruct the type of operation (operation method). For example, if the operations of the first effect button 63a include a push operation (single push operation) in which the first effect button 63a is pressed once within the operation acceptance period, and a long push operation in which the first effect button 63a is pressed continuously from the start to the end of the operation acceptance period, the first operation instruction effect may be executed as an instruction to perform a push operation (first specified operation), and the second operation instruction effect may be executed as an instruction to perform a long push operation (second specified operation).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the SP reach variation effect in which the first operation instruction effect is executed at the win/lose branch timing, the execution of the second operation instruction effect is restricted from the start of the SP reach effect to the end of the win/lose notification effect, i.e., during a predetermined period before the first operation instruction effect is executed, during the period in which the first operation instruction effect is executed, and during a predetermined period after the first operation instruction effect is executed. However, the period during which the execution of the second operation instruction effect is restricted is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to restrict the execution of the second operation instruction effect during a predetermined period before the first operation instruction effect is executed and during the period in which the first operation instruction effect is executed, or to restrict the execution of the second operation instruction effect during the period in which the first operation instruction effect is executed and during a predetermined period after the first operation instruction effect is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to restrict the execution of the second operation instruction effect during at least one of the predetermined period before the first operation instruction effect is executed and the predetermined period after the first operation instruction effect is executed, and during the period in which the first operation instruction effect is executed. This also makes it less likely that the effect of operating the first effect button 63a (first predetermined operation) will be impaired, making it easier for the player to experience the effect of the first predetermined operation. The same applies to restrictions on the execution of the first operation instruction effect when the second operation instruction effect is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch.

Here, the effect control microcomputer 91, which executes the processing related to determining and executing the operation instruction effects (first operation instruction effect, second operation instruction effect), functions as a "first operation instruction effect execution means" and a "second operation instruction effect execution means." Either or both of the first operation instruction effect execution means and the second operation instruction effect execution means are also referred to as the "operation instruction effect execution means."

Returning to FIG. 42, next, in S4506, processing related to setting the preview effect (preview effect setting processing) is performed (S4506). Preview effects are effects that suggest the currently running variable display or the currently stored pending variable display (variable display to be executed later). For example, preview effects suggest the possibility that the display result of the currently running variable display will be a specific display result (the expected degree of control in the special game state), the possibility that the display result of the variable display executed later will be a specific display result (the expected degree of control in the special game state), or the effect content (variable effect pattern) of the currently running variable display or the variable display to be executed later. Preview effects are also called "suggestive effects."

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various preview effects can be executed, such as preview effects based on the preview effect information (preliminary judgment results) stored in S4395 (also referred to as "pre-read preview") and preview effects related to the current (current) change display (also referred to as "the change") (also referred to as "the change preview"). Corresponding to this, multiple preview effect patterns are provided. Preview effects are executed, for example, by displaying an image suggesting the expected value (also referred to as a "preview image," "preview information," "suggestive image," or "suggestive information") on the display screen 7a (also referred to as a "preview display" or "suggestive display"). In addition to display effects (preview displays), preview effects can also be executed using sound effects, light effects, and moving effects, and can also be executed by combining these effects. In other words, preview effect patterns (suggestive effect patterns) include execution modes such as display effects, sound effects, light effects, and moving effects. When executing a preview performance, one of multiple preview performances (one type of preview performance) may be executed for one special chart hold or one variable display, or two or more preview performances (multiple types of preview performances) may be executed. When executing two or more preview performances, for example, two or more preview performances may be executed at the same time during the variable display, or preview performances may be executed one by one at multiple times (execution times) during the variable display.

In S4506, a determination is made as to whether or not each preview performance will be executed (pre-execution status), and the performance mode (pre-execution performance pattern) of the preview performance to be executed is set. Specifically, based on the preview performance determination random number obtained in S4501 and the preview performance determination table stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the preview performance and the preview performance pattern, and the preview performance pattern is set based on the result of this determination.

Multiple preview effect determination tables are provided, and the table to be used (referenced) in S4506 is determined based on the contents of the effect hold information stored in S4395 (preliminary judgment result), the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment specified by the analysis result of the variation start command in S4502 (hit/miss judgment result for the current special pattern change display (the change)), and the special pattern change pattern information specified by the analysis result of the variation start command (the change pattern and stopping pattern for the current special pattern change display (the change)), etc. In other words, in S4506, the preview effect pattern (showing mode) is determined by random number lottery based on the preliminary judgment result (holding advance reading result), the hit/miss judgment result for the change, the change pattern, etc. (showing mode determination means).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with preview effects (suggestive effects) that can be executed during the fluctuation period from the start to the end of the fluctuation display (fluctuating game) of the identification information (special symbols and/or performance symbols), i.e., as the fluctuation preview, at least a timer effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period, a preview effect that can be executed when the fluctuation display of the identification information starts (first predetermined time) (also referred to as a ``fluctuating start preview''), a preview effect that can be executed when a reach is achieved during the fluctuation display (during the fluctuation period) (second predetermined time) (also referred to as a ``reach achievement preview''), and a preview effect that can be executed when an NM reach effect develops into an SP reach effect during the fluctuation display (during the fluctuation period) (second predetermined time) (also referred to as a ``SP development preview''). The timer effect is also called the "period effect," the notification when a change starts is also called the "first suggestion effect," the notification when a reach is achieved is also called the "second suggestion effect," and the notification when an SP develops is also called the "second suggestion effect" or "third suggestion effect." The timer effect, notification when a change starts, notification when a reach is achieved, and notification when an SP develops will be explained later.

The preview effect setting process (S4506) performs processing related to preview effects (hold advance notice, change notice) that can be executed at a specified time, including during the change display (change effect) of the effect pattern 8, triggered by the start of that change display (change effect).The preview effects processed here do not include the hold icon notice (a type of hold advance notice) that accompanies the occurrence of a starting ball.In other words, the processing related to setting the hold icon notice that accompanies the occurrence of a starting ball is performed not by the preview effect setting process (S4506) but by the hold icon notice process (S4400) described below.

Here, preview performances (reserved preview performances) executed based on performance hold information (preview information) are also called "preview performances," preview performances executed based on special chart 1 performance hold information (first preview information) are also called "first preview performances," and preview performances executed based on special chart 2 performance hold information (second preview information) are also called "second preview performances."

In the preview effect setting process (S4506), a determination of whether to execute the hold read-ahead preview (preview effect) and the preview effect pattern are set when the preview effect restriction flag described above is OFF, but are not performed when the preview effect restriction flag is ON. In other words, as described above, if there is an abnormality in the storage of the effect hold information, the execution of the hold read-ahead preview is restricted (prohibited). On the other hand, for the variable preview, a determination of whether to execute it and the preview effect pattern are set regardless of the setting status of the preview effect restriction flag. For this reason, while the execution of the hold read-ahead preview may be restricted (prohibited), the execution of the variable preview is never restricted (prohibited). As a result, even if the execution of the hold read-ahead preview is restricted, the variable preview can still be executed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect.

Next, S4507 is processed, and the variable effect start processing (S4402) is completed. In S4507, a variable effect start command is set in the sub-output buffer to start variable effects based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 and the preview effect pattern set in S4506 (S4507).

When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM of the image control board 100 the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, i.e., the predetermined variable effect image data (image data indicating the start, current state, and stop of the change of the effect pattern 8) corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in S4505, and the preview effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, i.e., the predetermined preview effect image data corresponding to the preview effect pattern set in S4506, and executes the variable effect and preview effect etc. based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It also executes the variable display of the determination pattern 8s displayed in the determination pattern display area 7c. Furthermore, based on the variable effect pattern or preview effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, various effects such as sound effects, light effects, and moving effects (gimmick effects) are executed by the corresponding effect devices (speakers 67, board lamps 5, frame lamps 66, movable effect members 14, etc.).

[Hold icon notice processing]
Next, we will explain the pending icon notification process (S4400) that the performance control microcomputer 91 executes based on the reception of the start ball entry command from the main control board 80 (YES in S4390).

As shown in Figure 43, the pending icon preview process (S4400) first determines whether the preview effect restriction flag is OFF (S4600). As mentioned above, the preview effect restriction flag is a flag that is turned ON in S4399 if there is an abnormality in the storage (stored contents) of the pending effect information by S4395. If the preview effect restriction flag is ON, the execution of effects based on the pending effect information (preliminary determination result information specified by the start ball entry command) is restricted. Since the pending icon preview is a type of effect (pre-reading effect) based on pending effect information (preliminary determination result information), the setting status of the preview effect restriction flag is determined (confirmed).

If it is determined in S4600 that the preview effect restriction flag is not OFF (NO in S4600), that is, if the preview effect restriction flag is ON, this processing ends without performing the processing from S4601 onwards. As a result, while the preview effect restriction flag is ON, no new pending icon previews will be executed (started) (the execution of new pending icon previews is restricted). In contrast, if it is determined in S4600 that the preview effect restriction flag is OFF (YES in S4600), it is determined whether the pending icon preview flag is OFF (S4601).

The hold icon notification flag is a flag that indicates whether a hold icon notification is being executed. It is turned ON in S4606 (described below) when a hold icon notification is being executed, and is turned OFF upon the end of the variable display (variable game) corresponding to the special symbol hold (also called the "pre-notification target hold") that triggered the execution of the hold icon notification. Therefore, when a performance hold displayed in a preview display mode in the performance hold display area (first performance hold display area 9c or second performance hold display area 9d) moves to the variable hold display area 9e, even if a new performance hold is displayed (additional display) in the performance hold display area (first performance hold display area 9c, second performance hold display area 9d) until the variable display (variable game) corresponding to that performance hold (pre-notification target hold) ends, the new performance hold will not be displayed in a preview display mode. This makes it possible for the player to feel anticipation for a jackpot in the currently executing variable game (variable game corresponding to the pre-notification target hold).

The hold icon notification may be turned off upon the start of the variable display (variable play) corresponding to the special symbol hold that triggered the execution of the hold icon notification (consumption of the special symbol hold). In this case, while the effect hold is displayed in the variable symbol hold display area 9e in a preview display mode, the effect hold that is newly displayed (additionally displayed) in the effect hold display area (first effect hold display area 9c, second effect hold display area 9d) can be displayed in a preview display mode, making it possible to build up a sense of anticipation for not only the variable play currently being performed, but also the variable play corresponding to the subsequent special symbol hold (pre-notification target hold).

If it is determined in S4601 that the reserve icon announcement flag is not OFF (is ON) (NO in S4601), the reserve icon announcement is currently being executed, and so this process ends without performing processing from S4602 onwards. For this reason, in this embodiment, while the reserve icon announcement is being executed, a reserve icon announcement targeting a newly stored (additionally stored) special symbol announcement (later special symbol announcement) will not be executed. In other words, while the reserve icon announcement is being executed, the execution of a new reserve icon announcement is restricted. For this reason, two or more effect holds with announcement display modes will not be displayed in the effect hold display area. This prevents overlapping reserve icon announcements, attracts the player's interest in the variable play corresponding to the currently executing reserve icon announcement (announcement target hold), and makes it possible for the player to feel excited about that variable play.

In this embodiment, if the preview effect restriction flag is ON or the reserved icon preview flag is ON, a new reserved icon preview will not be executed (added); however, other conditions (reserved icon preview restriction conditions) may also be defined to prevent a new reserved icon preview from being executed. For example, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 at the time of the first starting ball entry (the number of reserved balls after adding 1 due to the starting ball entry) is less than a predetermined number (e.g., less than 2), the execution of the reserved icon preview may be restricted (prohibited) from the perspective of the execution period of the reserved icon preview, the presentation effect, etc.

Alternatively, a hold icon preview flag may not be set, and a hold icon preview for a subsequent special chart hold may be executed while a hold icon preview is being executed. In other words, the hold preview display area may be configured to display two or more hold preview display modes.

If it is determined in S4601 that the hold icon notification flag is OFF (YES in S4601), the hold icon notification determination table is set (S4602), and a determination is made using a random number for determining the hold icon notification (S4603).

The hold icon announcement determination table is a table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a hold icon announcement and the announcement pattern (hold icon announcement pattern) if an announcement is executed, and is configured, for example, as shown in Figure 49. The hold icon announcement determination random number is a type of random number used to determine the presentation, and takes a value in the range of, for example, "0 to 199."
This is an example

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of executing a reserve icon notification using the first effect hold 9a (also referred to as the "first reserve icon notification") when the gaming state is a low-probability low-base state, i.e., a low-base state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable game) is primarily executed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is a low-probability high-base state or a high-probability high-base state, i.e., a high-base state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable game) is primarily executed, it is capable of executing a reserve icon notification using the second effect hold 9b (also referred to as the "second reserve icon notification"). Corresponding to this, in S4602, if the current gaming state is a low-base state, a reserve icon notification determination table is set for making a decision (determination) regarding the first reserve icon notification, and if the current gaming state is a high-base state, a reserve icon notification determination table is set for making a decision (determination) regarding the second reserve icon notification.

The hold icon preview determination table shown in Figure 49 is an example of a table (for the first hold icon preview) used to determine the first hold icon preview in a low base state. As shown in the figure, the hold icon preview determination table of this embodiment classifies the pre-determination results that can be identified based on the newly stored effect preview information (the newly acquired effect preview information corresponding to the special chart preview) in S4395 described above into "jackpot," "SP reach miss," "normal reach miss," and "no reach miss," and assigns a random number value for determining the hold icon preview for each pre-determination result to each of the "prediction patterns A to E" of the hold icon preview that can be executed in a "non-execution" and low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state).

Note that the table shown in Figure 49 is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment. Also, "Not Executed" in the table means that the hold icon notification will not be executed (hold icon notification non-execution pattern), and "-" in the table means that a random number value for determining the hold icon notification has not been assigned, i.e., the notification pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (is not eligible for selection).

The random number for determining the pending icon notification can be obtained, for example, when the start shot command is received (S4390) or when a determination regarding the pending icon notification is made (S4603). The obtained random number for determining the pending icon notification is then determined (S4603) using the pending icon notification determination table set in S4602.

For example, in a low probability, low base state, if the random number value for determining the reserved icon preview obtained based on the first starting ball entry is "175", the reserved icon preview determination table shown in Figure 49 is referenced, and if the preliminary determination result of the newly stored special reserved pattern (here, the first special reserved pattern) is a jackpot, it is determined to be "Prediction Pattern E", if the preliminary determination result is a miss in the SP reach, it is determined to be "Prediction Pattern C", if the preliminary determination result is a miss in the normal reach, it is determined to be "Prediction Pattern A", and if the preliminary determination result is a miss in the no-reach, it is determined to be "Not executed".

Regarding the results of the pre-determination in the low base state (non-time-saving state), a jackpot occurs when the result of the pre-determination regarding the special symbol hit/miss is a jackpot and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is one of P1, P2, and P3 (fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms or more); an SP reach miss occurs when the result of the pre-determination regarding the special symbol hit/miss is a miss and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is one of P4, P5, and P6 (fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms or more); a normal reach miss occurs when the result of the pre-determination regarding the special symbol hit/miss is a miss and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is P7 (fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms); and a no-reach miss occurs when the result of the pre-determination regarding the special symbol hit/miss is a miss and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is one of P8, P9, and P10 (fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 12,000 ms or less) (see Figure 9A). Furthermore, the preliminary determination results (jackpot, SP reach miss, normal reach miss, no reach miss) in the high base state (time-saving state) can be considered the same as in the low base state (non-time-saving state) (see Figure 9B), so explanations will be omitted.

Here, we will explain the hold icon preview patterns and hold icon previews that can be set based on the hold icon preview determination table shown in Figure 49. In this embodiment, multiple types of hold icons with different display modes are provided as hold icons (effective holds 9a, 9b) that can be displayed in the effect hold display areas 9c, 9d and the variable hold display area 9e. Specifically, as shown in Figure 55, there are normal hold icons that are displayed when the hold icon preview is not being executed (also referred to as the "normal display mode"), and special hold icons that are displayed when the hold icon preview is being executed (also referred to as the "preview display mode"). One type or two or more types (multiple types) of normal hold icons and special hold icons can each be provided. The normal hold icon is also referred to as the "normal hold display" or "normal memory display," and the special hold icon is also referred to as the "special hold display" or "special memory display."

The normal hold icon (the normal display mode of the hold icon) can be, for example, a hold design (a special hold image) made up of a specific color or shape, and may include letters, numbers, symbols, etc. that represent the number of holds.

The special hold icon (preview display mode of the hold icon) can be a hold design (performance hold image) that is created by, for example, having a different color, size, shape (design), etc. compared to the normal hold icon (normal display mode), or by adding special displays such as characters, items, letters, symbols, etc. to the normal hold icon (normal display mode). In other words, the special hold icon is made to be more visually noticeable than the normal hold icon.

As shown in Figure 55, in this embodiment, the normal hold icon (normal display mode) is provided with a white circular hold symbol. The special hold icon (preview display mode) is provided with a blue, green, or red circular hold symbol, and a timer-shaped hold symbol that resembles a digitally displayed timer. The timer-shaped hold symbol comes in relatively small and large display sizes. The white circular hold symbol (normal hold icon) is also referred to as a "white hold," the blue circular hold symbol (a type of special hold icon) is also referred to as a "blue hold," and the red circular hold symbol (a type of special hold icon) is also referred to as a "red hold." The timer-shaped hold symbol (a type of special hold icon) is also referred to as a "timer hold," and a timer hold with a relatively small display size is also referred to as a "small timer hold," and a timer hold with a relatively large display size is also referred to as a "large timer hold." Additionally, preview effects using the hold icon (effect hold) (hold icon preview, pre-reading effect) and preview effects using a timer hold (hold icon preview using timer hold) are also referred to as "specific effects."

Among the warning patterns (hold icon warning patterns) in the hold icon warning table shown in Figure 49, warning pattern A is a pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon is blue hold, warning pattern B is a pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon is green hold, warning pattern C is a pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon is red hold, warning pattern D is a pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon is small timer hold, and warning pattern E is a pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon is large timer hold.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special hold icon, which is caused by a change in color or shape of the hold icon (a timer in this embodiment), is configured to indicate the possibility that the hold subject to the notice is a jackpot hold, that is, the possibility that the variable effect caused by the consumption of the hold subject to the notice will result in a jackpot (in other words, the expected probability of a jackpot). Specifically, based on the selection rate (selection rate, determination rate) of the notice pattern for each preliminary determination result defined in the hold icon notice determination table shown in FIG. 49, when the color of the hold icon is changed, the expected probability increases in the order of blue hold (notice pattern A), green hold (notice pattern B), and red hold (notice pattern C), and when the shape of the hold icon is changed, the expected probability increases in the order of small timer hold and large timer hold.

In addition to indicating the expected probability of the predicted hold, the timer hold also indicates the possibility that the timer effect described below may be executed in the variable effect caused by the consumption of the predicted hold. In other words, the timer hold functions as a hint regarding the execution of the timer effect. For this reason, in this embodiment, the display mode of the timer hold (the display mode of the timer-shaped hold pattern) is such that the time display portion is "???:???" (also referred to as the "standby display mode"). This is because the timer effect has not been executed (started) at the time when the timer hold is displayed as the hold icon corresponding to the special symbol hold (hold memory).

The above-mentioned hold icon announcements can attract the player's interest in the display mode of the hold icon when the hold icon announcement is executed, and whether or not a timer effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to Figure 43, if the result of the judgment in S4603 is that the hold icon notification will not be executed (NO in S4604), this processing ends without performing processing from S4605 onwards.If the hold icon notification will be executed (YES in S4604), the hold icon notification pattern (one of notification patterns A to E) determined (selected) based on the hold icon notification table is set (S4605).

Next, in S4606, the hold icon notification flag is turned ON (S4606). In this embodiment, the hold icon notification flag is set according to the type of hold icon notification pattern (notification patterns A to E). Therefore, for example, if the hold icon notification pattern set in S4605 (determined by the judgment of S4603) is notification pattern B, the hold icon notification flag corresponding to notification pattern B is turned ON, and if it is notification pattern E, the hold icon notification flag corresponding to notification pattern E is turned ON.

Next, in S4607, a value equivalent to the number of special chart reserved balls after adding 1 due to the storage of the special chart reserved (reserved for announcement) that is the target of this reserve icon announcement is set in the reserve icon announcement counter (S4607). For example, if the number of special chart reserved balls when the special chart 1 start ball entry command is received (S4390), i.e., the number of special chart 1 reserved balls after adding 1 due to the occurrence of the first start ball entry, is "3", the reserve icon announcement counter is set to the value "3". The value to be set in the reserve icon announcement counter can also be determined based on the special chart reserved ball count command (see S2502) sent from the main control board 80.

The value of the reserved icon preview counter set in S4607 will be decremented by 1 each time the display of a special symbol of the same type as the reserved special symbol that triggered the setting of the counter (for example, the first special symbol for the first reserved special symbol) begins to change.

Next, a hold icon notification command instructing the execution of a hold icon notification based on the hold icon notification pattern set in S4605 is set in the sub-output buffer (S4608), and this processing is terminated.

When the hold icon preview command set in S4608 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcontroller 101 reads from the ROM of the image control board 100 image data for the hold icon preview (effect hold image data, etc.) corresponding to the hold icon preview pattern identified based on the received hold icon preview command, i.e., the hold icon preview pattern set in S4605, and executes the hold icon preview based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (effect hold display area, variable hold display area).

The above explains the hold icon notification process (S4400) mainly using the example of a hold icon notification (first hold icon notification) based on the hold icon notification table in a low base state, but the same procedure can also be used for a hold icon notification (second hold icon notification) in a high base state.

The configuration of the hold icon preview table, i.e., the execution rate of the hold icon preview and the selection rate (execution rate) of each preview pattern, may be the same or different between the low base state and the high base state. Furthermore, the content, type, and number of hold icon preview patterns (preview display modes of the hold icon) may be the same or different between the low base state and the high base state. Furthermore, the number (types) of hold icon preview patterns may be greater or less than in this embodiment. Furthermore, the display modes (normal display mode and/or preview display mode) of the first performance hold 9a (first hold icon) and the second performance hold 9b (second hold icon) may be the same or different.

Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the pending icon notification process (S4400) functions as a "specific effect execution means."

[Notice of relevant changes]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing the timer effect, the fluctuation start notice, the reach establishment notice, and the SP development notice as the fluctuation notice (pre-notification effect). These pre-notification effects will be explained below.

The timer effect, the notification when a change starts, the notification when a reach is achieved, and the notification when a SP develops are notification effects (suggestive effects) that can be executed for the change display of identification information (change play) that is executed at least in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state). In other words, they are notification effects (suggestive effects) that can be executed at least in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state). Therefore, the following explanations of the timer effect, the notification when a change starts, the notification when a reach is achieved, and the notification when a SP develops are based on the assumption that the change display of the first special symbol is executed (the first special symbol reserve is consumed) in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state).

When the change notice is executed in one change display (change period), any one of the change start notice, reach establishment notice, and SP development notice may be executed, or two or more may be executed, or all may be executed. In other words, when the change notice is executed, at least one of the change start notice, reach establishment notice, and SP development notice can be executed in one change display (change period).

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, the timer effect displays the time (remaining time) until a reach is achieved or an SP reach effect develops, so when a timer effect is executed in one variable display (variable period), a reach achievement notice or an SP development notice will be executed in that variable display (variable period). When a timer effect and a reach achievement notice are executed in one variable display (variable period), the timer effect also functions as an effect that displays the time (remaining time) until the reach achievement notice is executed. In this case, the reach achievement notice will be executed after the time (remaining time) displayed in the timer effect has elapsed. In addition, when a timer effect and an SP development notice are executed in one variable display (variable period), the timer effect also functions as an effect that displays the time (remaining time) until the SP development notice is executed. In this case, the SP development notice will be executed after the time (remaining time) displayed in the timer effect has elapsed.

[Timer effect]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a timer effect (period effect) at any one of a plurality of predetermined execution times during the variable period.

There are three execution patterns for the timer effect: execution pattern A, in which the timer display (displaying the passage of a predetermined period) begins when the display of effect pattern 8 (and special pattern) begins to change; execution pattern B, in which the timer display (displaying the passage of a predetermined period) begins when the first stopped pattern stops (temporary stop) after effect pattern 8 begins to change; and execution pattern C, in which the timer display (displaying the passage of a predetermined period) begins when a reach is achieved after effect pattern 8 begins to change (see Figure 50 (4)).

Execution pattern A starts a timer effect (timer display) at the start of the fluctuation period, and displays the remaining time until a reach is achieved (10 seconds in this example) in countdown format (countdown display) (see Figure 57 (2)). In other words, the execution time (execution period) of the timer effect according to execution pattern A is approximately 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation period until a reach is achieved.

Execution pattern B starts a timer effect (timer display) when the first stop symbol stops during the variable period, and displays the remaining time (21 seconds in this example) until the SP Reach develops in countdown format (countdown display) (see Figure 58 (2)). In other words, the execution time (execution period) of the timer effect according to execution pattern B is approximately 21 seconds from the time the first stop symbol stops during the variable period until the SP Reach develops.

Execution pattern C starts a timer effect (timer display) when a reach is achieved during the variable period, and displays the remaining time (20 seconds in this example) until it develops into an SP reach in countdown format (countdown display) (see Figure 59 (2)). In other words, the execution time (execution period) for the timer effect according to execution pattern C is approximately 20 seconds from the achievement of a reach to the development of an SP reach during the variable period.

The timer effect of execution pattern A displays the remaining time until a reach is achieved, and can therefore be executed as a variable display (reach variable effect) based on special chart variation patterns P1 to P7 (see Figure 9A).

The timer effects of execution patterns B and C both display the remaining time until development into an SP Reach, and can therefore be executed as a variable display (SP Reach variable effect) based on special chart variable patterns P1 to P6 (see Figure 9A). Furthermore, because the timer effect of execution pattern B starts execution (timer operation starts) earlier than the timer effect of execution pattern C, the remaining time until development into an SP Reach displayed in the timer effect will be different.

In this embodiment, the timer effect can be executed based on any of the above execution patterns A to C. That is, the timer effect can be executed for any of the following periods: approximately 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation (execution pattern A), approximately 21 seconds from the stopping of the first stop symbol (execution pattern B), or approximately 20 seconds from the establishment of a reach (execution pattern C). The execution pattern of the timer effect, i.e., the start timing of the timer effect when it is executed, can suggest the degree of expectation.

In addition, the display patterns for the timer effect include display pattern A, in which the timer display color (display color) is blue, display pattern B, in which the timer display color (display color) is green, and display pattern C, in which the timer display color (display color) is red (see Figure 50 (5)), and the display pattern (display color) can indicate the degree of expectation.

As mentioned above, since the timer effect is an effect that can be executed as a change notice (pre-notice effect), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the timer effect, and the execution pattern and display pattern if the timer effect is executed, during the pre-notice effect setting process (S4506) in the change effect start process (S4402). Specifically, it performs the timer effect processing (S5000) shown in Figure 44.

As shown in FIG. 44, the timer effect processing (S5000) first determines whether the pending icon notification flag is OFF, i.e., whether the pending icon notification is being executed (S5001). The pending icon notification flag is a flag that is turned ON in the aforementioned S4606 (see FIG. 43). As a result, if it is determined that the pending icon notification flag is OFF (the pending icon notification is not being executed) (YES in S5001), the timer effect execution determination table A shown in FIG. 50 (1) is set (S5002). In this embodiment, if the pending icon notification is not being executed, the timer effect can be executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the pending icon notification not being executed.

In contrast, if it is determined that the hold icon announcement flag is not OFF (is ON) (YES in S5001), that is, if the hold icon announcement is being executed, it is determined whether the value of the hold icon announcement counter is "1" (S5003). The hold icon announcement counter is a counter set in the aforementioned S4607 (see Figure 43), and if the count value is "1" at the time of the determination process in S5003, this means that the current change effect (change display) that is about to begin corresponds to the first special chart hold (announcement target hold) that triggered the execution of the hold icon announcement. In other words, the time has come to consume the target hold (announcement target hold) of the hold icon announcement.

If it is determined that the value of the hold icon notification counter is not "1" (NO in S5003), it is determined whether the currently executing hold icon notification is due to a timer hold (S5004). The determination in S5004 can be made, for example, by referring to the setting status of the hold icon notification flag, which is set according to the hold icon notification patterns A to E (see Figure 49), and the display status (display control content) of the currently displayed hold icon.

If S5004 determines that the currently executing hold icon notification is due to a timer hold (YES in S5004), this processing ends without proceeding to S5005 and subsequent processing. In this case, a hold icon notification due to a timer hold is being executed (the special hold icon is displayed) for the first special chart hold corresponding to any of the special chart 1 hold ball counts "2" to "4." In this embodiment, the timer effect is not executed under such circumstances. This is because, for example, if a timer hold is displayed as the special hold icon for the first special chart hold corresponding to any of the special chart 1 hold ball counts "2" to "4," if the timer effect is executed (occurs) before the timer hold (the hold subject to the notification) is consumed, the significance of the timer hold (the notification effect) will be diminished. In other words, the timer hold has the function of suggesting that a timer effect may be executed in a change effect caused by the consumption of a special symbol hold (a hold subject to the announcement) that triggered the execution of the hold icon announcement due to that timer hold (the trigger for the display of the timer hold); if a timer effect were executed in a change effect caused by the consumption of a special symbol hold that occurred before the timer hold, a discrepancy in the presentation would occur.

In contrast, if it is determined that the currently executing hold icon announcement is not due to a timer hold (NO in S5004), the timer effect execution determination table A shown in Figure 50 (1) is set (S5002). In this embodiment, the timer effect can be executed not only when a hold icon announcement is not being executed, but also when a hold icon announcement is being executed by changing the color of the hold icon, and in a change effect due to the consumption of the target hold of the hold icon announcement by changing the color of the hold icon (also called a "color change announcement target hold"). This, combined with the presentation effect of the hold icon announcement by changing the color of the hold icon, can increase the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that the value of the hold icon preview counter is "1" (YES in S5003), that is, if the current variable effect that is about to begin corresponds to the target hold of the hold icon preview (prediction target hold), in other words, if the first special chart preview that is about to be consumed is the target hold of the hold icon preview, it is determined whether the hold icon preview is due to a small timer hold (S5005), and if it is determined that it is not due to a small timer hold (NO in S5005), it is determined whether the hold icon preview is due to a large timer hold (S5007). The determinations in S5005 and S5007, like the determination in S5004, can be made by, for example, referring to the setting status of the hold icon preview flag set according to the preview patterns A to E of the hold icon preview (see FIG. 49), and the display status (display control content) of the currently displayed hold icon.

If it is determined in S5005 that the small timer is on hold (YES in S5005), the timer effect execution determination table B shown in Figure 50 (2) is set (S5006), and if it is determined in S5007 that the large timer is on hold (YES in S5007), the timer effect execution determination table C shown in Figure 50 (3) is set (S5008).

In contrast, if S5005 determines that the effect is not due to the small timer being held (NO in S5005) and S5007 determines that the effect is not due to the large timer being held (NO in S5007), the timer effect execution determination table A shown in Figure 50 (1) is set (S5002).

Next, in S5009, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a timer effect based on the timer effect execution determination table (one of timer effect execution determination tables A to C) set in S5002, S5006, or S5008 and the random number for timer effect execution determination (S5009).

Here, the timer effect execution determination tables A to C of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 50 (1) to (3). Note that the tables shown in these figures are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

All of the timer effect execution determination tables A through C are configured by assigning random values for timer effect execution determination to "non-execute" and "execute" for the special symbol change patterns (P1 through P10, see Figure 9A) that can be selected when executing (starting) the display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) change in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state). However, timer effect execution determination table C (see Figure 50 (3)) does not include P5 through P10 among the special symbol change patterns P1 through P10. This is because the hold icon announcement due to the big timer hold can be executed for special symbol holds whose preliminary determination results are "jackpot" or "SP reach miss," i.e., special symbol holds whose change time is 45,000 ms or longer (change patterns P1 through P6) (see Figures 9A and 49).

The random number used to determine whether a timer effect will be performed is a type of random number used to determine the effect obtained in S4501 mentioned above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", for example.

In the tables shown in Figures 50 (1) to (3), "Not Execute" means that the timer effect will not be executed, and "Execute" means that the timer effect will be executed. Also, "-" in the same table means that a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect has not been assigned.

According to the timer effect execution judgment table of this embodiment, for timer effect execution judgment tables A and B, the rate at which "execution" is determined (timer effect execution rate) is highest when the special chart fluctuation pattern for the current fluctuation effect that is about to begin, i.e., the special chart fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command (information specifying the fluctuation pattern) included in the fluctuation start command received in S4401 described above, is P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation), followed by P4 to P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation) and P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation), in that order, and is not selected (timer effect is not executed) for P8 to P10 (no reach miss fluctuation). Furthermore, for timer effect execution judgment table C, the rate at which "execution" is determined (timer effect execution rate) is higher when the special chart fluctuation pattern is P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation) compared to P4 to P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation).

On the other hand, for timer effect execution determination tables A and B, the percentage of times the result is determined to be "non-executable" (non-execution percentage of timer effects) is highest (100% in this embodiment) when the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation effect is P8 to P10 (no-reach miss fluctuation), followed by P7 (NM miss-reach fluctuation), P4 to P6 (SP miss-reach fluctuation), and P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation), in that order. Furthermore, for timer effect execution determination table C, the percentage of times the result is determined to be "non-executable" (non-execution percentage of timer effects) is higher when the special chart fluctuation pattern is P4 to P6 (SP miss-reach fluctuation) compared to P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation).

For this reason, when a timer effect is executed during a variable effect, the possibility of an SP reach effect being executed during that variable effect (SP expectation rate) and the possibility of a jackpot being achieved (jackpot expectation rate) are higher than when the timer effect is not executed.

Furthermore, among the timer effect execution determination tables A to C, the rate at which "execution" is determined (timer effect execution rate) is highest for timer effect execution determination table C, followed by timer effect execution determination table B and timer effect execution determination table A, in that order.

For this reason, in a change effect that starts when a hold icon notification is not being executed, or when a hold targeting a hold icon notification (color change in this embodiment) other than a timer hold (notification patterns A to C) is consumed, the timer effect is less likely to be executed (the execution rate of the timer effect is lower) than in a change effect that starts when a hold targeting a hold icon notification by a small timer hold (notification pattern D) (also referred to as a "small timer notification target hold") is consumed, or when a hold targeting a hold icon notification by a large timer hold (notification pattern E) (also referred to as a "large timer notification target hold") is consumed. In other words, in a change effect that starts when a hold targeting a small timer notification is consumed, or when a hold targeting a large timer notification is consumed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed (the execution rate of the timer effect is higher) than in a change effect that starts when a hold icon notification is not being executed, or when a hold targeting a hold icon notification by a hold icon notification other than a timer hold (notification patterns A to C) (color change notification target hold) is consumed.

Furthermore, in the variable effects that start when the large timer pre-notification target reserve is consumed, the timer effects are more likely to be executed (the timer effects have a higher execution rate) than the variable effects that start when the small timer pre-notification target reserve is consumed. In other words, the execution rate of the timer effects is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the timer reserve.

In this way, by changing the table used to determine whether or not a timer effect is to be executed depending on the display status of the timer hold (the execution status of the hold icon notification due to the timer hold), it is possible to change the execution rate of the timer effect depending on the display mode of the timer hold. This draws the player's interest in the display mode of the timer hold (the execution mode of the hold icon notification due to the timer hold) and whether or not a timer effect is executed after the timer hold is displayed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if the target hold for the timer hold icon announcement (also called the "timer announcement target hold") is consumed, the timer effect execution determination random number is also assigned to "non-execution" in timer effect execution determination tables B and C, so the timer effect may not be executed in the variable effect that is executed when the timer announcement target hold is consumed. In this case, the timer hold hold icon announcement is a false announcement. In other words, the timer hold hold icon announcement can be executed even when the timer effect is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the execution of the timer hold hold icon announcement, and to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect.

In addition, for a change effect that starts when a timer notification target reserve is consumed, the timer effect may be made less likely to be executed (the execution rate of the timer effect may be made lower) compared to a change effect that starts when a reserve icon preview is not being executed, or a change effect that starts when a color change notification target reserve is consumed. In this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that a timer effect may be executed even if a reserve icon preview due to a timer reserve is not executed (even if a timer reserve is not displayed). In other words, it is possible to create anticipation for the execution of a timer effect even if a timer reserve is not displayed.

Returning to Figure 44, if the result of the timer effect execution determination (S5009) is that the timer effect will not be executed (NO in S5010), this processing ends without performing the processing from S5011 onwards. On the other hand, if the timer effect will be executed (YES in S5010), the timer effect execution pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (4) is set (S5011).

Next, in S5012, the execution pattern of the timer effect to be executed in this variable effect is determined and set based on the timer effect execution pattern determination table and the random number for determining the timer effect execution pattern set in S5011 (S5012). As mentioned above, there are three types of timer effect execution patterns, execution patterns A to C, so in S5012, one of execution patterns A to C is set.

As mentioned above, execution pattern A is a pattern in which the timer effect starts to execute when the fluctuation period begins, execution pattern B is a pattern in which the timer effect starts to execute when the first stop symbol stops during the fluctuation period, and execution pattern C is a pattern in which the timer effect starts to execute when a reach is achieved during the fluctuation period. Therefore, the processing of S5012 is also a process in which the execution timing (execution time) of the timer effect to be executed in the current fluctuation period is determined and set.

The timer effect execution pattern determination table for this embodiment will now be explained with reference to Figure 50 (4). Note that the table shown in this figure is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 50 (4), the timer effect execution pattern determination table of this embodiment is configured by assigning random number values for determining the timer effect execution pattern to "Execution Pattern A," "Execution Pattern B," and "Execution Pattern C" for special symbol fluctuation patterns P1 to P7 (reach or higher) that can be selected when executing (starting) the display of a special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) fluctuation in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state). However, for special symbol fluctuation pattern P7, the random number value for determining the timer effect execution pattern is assigned only to "Execution Pattern A." As mentioned above, both execution patterns B and C display the remaining time until the development into an SP reach, and therefore execution patterns B and C do not apply to special symbol fluctuation pattern P7 (NM reach-miss fluctuation), in which an SP reach effect is not executed.

The random number for determining the timer effect execution pattern is a type of random number for determining the effect obtained in S4501 mentioned above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", for example. Note that "-" in the table shown in Figure 50 (4) means that no random number value for determining the timer effect execution pattern has been assigned, meaning that the execution pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (is not eligible for selection).

The timer effect execution pattern determination table in this embodiment does not include special chart change patterns P8 to P10. This is because the timer effect execution determination tables A to C described above prevent timer effects from being executed for special chart change patterns P8 to P10 (see Figure 50 (1) to (3)).

According to the timer effect execution pattern determination table of this embodiment, the rate at which execution pattern A is selected (the rate at which timer effects are executed by execution pattern A) is highest when the special symbol change pattern for the current change effect (the special symbol change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command included in the change start command received in S4401 described above) is P7 (NM reach miss change), followed by P4 to P6 (SP reach miss change) and P1 to P3 (jackpot change), in that order. Furthermore, the rate at which execution pattern B is selected (the rate at which timer effects are executed by execution pattern B) is the same whether the special symbol change pattern for the current change effect is P1 to P3 (jackpot change) or P4 to P6 (SP reach miss change). Furthermore, the rate at which execution pattern C is selected (the rate at which timer effects are executed by execution pattern C) is higher when the special symbol change pattern for the current change effect is P1 to P3 (jackpot change) than when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach miss change).

When the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation), the probability of it being determined to be execution pattern C is highest, followed by execution pattern B and execution pattern A in decreasing order; when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation), the probability of it being determined to be execution pattern A is highest, followed by execution pattern B and execution pattern C in decreasing order; and when it is P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation), it is always (100% likely) determined to be execution pattern A (it is never determined to be execution pattern B or C).

For this reason, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of the timer effect according to execution pattern A, the timer effect according to execution pattern B, and the timer effect according to execution pattern C, i.e., the timer effect that starts when the fluctuation period begins, the timer effect that starts when the first stop symbol stops, and the timer effect that starts when a reach is achieved. In other words, the timer effect according to execution pattern A is a preview effect with a low expectation level (low expectation preview), the timer effect according to execution pattern B is a preview effect with a medium expectation level (medium expectation preview), and the timer effect according to execution pattern C is a preview effect with a high expectation level (high expectation preview).

Furthermore, when focusing on a specific timing among the multiple timings at which the timer effect can be executed during the fluctuation period (in this embodiment, when the fluctuation starts, when the first stop symbol stops, and when a reach is achieved), for example, when focusing on the start of fluctuation (execution pattern A), the rate at which the timer effect is executed at the start of fluctuation (execution rate) is different between a jackpot fluctuation (when controlled to the special gaming state) and a miss fluctuation (when not controlled to the special gaming state). Furthermore, when focusing on the reach is achieved (execution pattern C), the rate at which the timer effect is executed when a reach is achieved (execution rate) is different between a jackpot fluctuation (when controlled to the special gaming state) and a miss fluctuation (when not controlled to the special gaming state) (see Figure 50 (4)).

This will attract the player's interest in the timing of the execution (start) of the timer effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Returning to Figure 44, once the execution pattern for the timer effect is set in S5012, the timer effect display pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (5) is then set (S5013), and the display pattern for the timer effect to be executed in this variable effect is determined based on the timer effect display pattern determination table and the random number for determining the timer effect display pattern that has been set, and this is set (S5014), and this processing ends. As mentioned above, there are three types of display patterns for the timer effect, display patterns A to C, so in S5014, one of display patterns A to C is set.

The timer effect display pattern determination table for this embodiment will now be explained with reference to Figure 50 (5). Note that the table shown in this figure is merely an example, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 50 (5), the timer effect display pattern determination table of this embodiment is configured by assigning random number values for determining the timer effect display pattern to "display pattern A," "display pattern B," and "display pattern C" for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7 that can be selected when executing (starting) the variable display of a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state). However, for special symbol variation pattern P7, the random number value for determining the timer effect display pattern is assigned to "display pattern A" and "display pattern B," but not to "display pattern C."

The random number for determining the timer effect display pattern is a type of random number for determining the effect obtained in S4501 mentioned above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", for example. Note that "-" in the table shown in Figure 50 (5) means that no random number value for determining the timer effect display pattern has been assigned, meaning that the display pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (is not eligible for selection).

The timer effect display pattern determination table in this embodiment does not include special chart change patterns P8 to P10. This is because the timer effect execution determination tables A to C described above prevent timer effects from being executed for special chart change patterns P8 to P10 (see Figures 50 (1) to (3)).

According to the timer effect display pattern determination table of this embodiment, the rate at which display pattern A is selected (the rate at which timer effects are executed by display pattern A) is highest when the special symbol change pattern for this current change effect (the special symbol change pattern specified by the change pattern designation command included in the change start command received in S4401 described above) is P7 (NM reach miss change), followed by P4 to P6 (SP reach miss change) and P1 to P3 (jackpot change), in that order. Furthermore, the rate at which display pattern B is selected (the rate at which timer effects are executed by display pattern B) is the same when the special symbol change pattern for this current change effect is P1 to P3 (jackpot change) and P4 to P6 (SP reach miss change), and is lower when it is P7 (NM reach miss change). Additionally, the rate at which display pattern C is determined (the rate at which the timer effect using display pattern C is executed) is higher when the special chart change pattern for this change effect is P1 to P3 (jackpot change) than when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach miss change).

When the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation), the probability of it being determined to be display pattern C is highest, followed by display pattern B and then display pattern A, in decreasing order; when it is P4 to P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation), the probability of it being determined to be display pattern A is highest, followed by display pattern B and then display pattern C, in decreasing order; and when it is P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation), the probability of it being determined to be execution pattern A is higher than the probability of it being determined to be execution pattern B, and it is never determined to be display pattern C.

For this reason, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of the timer effect by display pattern A, the timer effect by display pattern B, and the timer effect by display pattern C, i.e., the timer effect by blue timer display, the timer effect by green timer display, and the timer effect by red timer display. In other words, the timer effect by display pattern A (blue timer display) is a preview effect with a low expectation level (low expectation preview), the timer effect by display pattern B (green timer display) is a preview effect with a medium expectation level (medium expectation preview), and the timer effect by display pattern C (red timer display) is a preview effect with a high expectation level (high expectation preview).

Furthermore, when focusing on a specific display mode among the multiple display modes of the timer effect (in this embodiment, blue timer display, green timer display, red timer display), for example, the blue timer display (display pattern A), the rate at which the timer effect using the blue timer display is executed is configured to differ between the case of a jackpot fluctuation (when controlled to the special game state) and the case of a miss fluctuation (when not controlled to the special game state), and when focusing on the red timer display (display pattern C), the rate at which the timer effect using the red timer display (specific display mode) is executed is configured to differ between the case of a jackpot fluctuation (when controlled to the special game state) and the case of a miss fluctuation (when not controlled to the special game state) (see Figure 50 (5)).

This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the display mode of the timer effect (in this embodiment, the color of the timer display), thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

By setting the execution pattern and display pattern for the timer effect through the processing of S5011 to S5014 above, the timer effect pattern to be executed in the current variable effect is set. The timer effect pattern set in this way is included in the variable effect start command set in S4507 mentioned above. When this variable effect start command is sent to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM of the image control board 100 image data for the timer effect that corresponds to the timer effect pattern (execution pattern + display pattern) specified based on the received variable effect start command, and executes a timer effect based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, if a hold icon notification is being executed due to a timer hold, and a timer effect is executed according to execution pattern A in a change effect due to the expiration of that timer hold (the hold subject to notification), the timer effect will start with the start (start of change) of that change effect following the previous change effect (stop of change), as shown in Figures 57 (1) and (2). Specifically, when the change effect ends (stops change) while a timer hold is displayed in the effect hold display area 9c (see Figure 57 (1)), and the next change effect starts (the timer hold is expired), the timer hold that was displayed in the effect hold display area 9c before the start of that change effect is displayed as a change hold icon in the change hold display area 9e with the start (start of change) of the change effect, and the timer effect will start.

In addition, when a hold icon notification is being executed due to a timer hold, and a timer effect is executed according to execution pattern B in a variable effect due to the expiration of that timer hold (the hold subject to notification), as shown in Figures 58 (1) and (2), after the variable effect starts, the timer effect starts when the first stopping symbol stops, as shown in Figures 58 (1) and (2). Specifically, after the variable effect starts due to the expiration of the timer hold, the timer hold as a variable hold icon is displayed in a standby display mode (in this embodiment, "???:???") until the first stopping symbol stops (see Figure 58 (1)), and when the first stopping symbol stops, the timer effect starts (see Figure 58 (2)).

In addition, when a hold icon announcement is being made due to a timer hold, and a timer presentation using execution pattern C is executed in a variable presentation due to the expiration of that timer hold (the hold subject to announcement), as shown in Figures 59 (1) and (2), after the variable presentation starts, the timer presentation starts when a reach is achieved (the reach pattern stops), as shown in Figures 59 (1) and (2). Specifically, after the variable presentation starts due to the expiration of the timer hold, the timer hold as a variable hold icon is displayed in a standby display mode (in this embodiment, "???:???") until a reach is achieved (the second stop pattern stops with the reach pattern) (see Figure 59 (1)), and when a reach is achieved, the timer presentation starts (see Figure 59 (2)).

In this embodiment, because it is possible to execute a hold icon preview (preview patterns D and E) in which the display mode of the hold icon is a timer hold (see Figures 49 and 55), and in consideration of coordination with the hold icon preview due to timer hold, the display mode of the variable hold icon displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is set to a timer shape (timer display mode, timer effect image) to execute a timer effect (see Figures 57 (2), 58 (2), and 59 (2)). Specifically, when a variable effect corresponding to the timer hold (preview target hold) is started (the timer hold is consumed) and the timer effect begins to be executed in conjunction with the start of the variable effect, the timer effect image displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is immediately displayed in a mode in which a timer countdown display is displayed (also referred to as an "operation display mode") (see Figures 57 (1) and (2)). On the other hand, if the timer effect does not start executing in conjunction with the start of the variable effect, the timer effect image displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is displayed in a standby display mode until the timer effect starts to be executed (see Figures 58 (1) and 59 (1)), and then, as the timer effect starts to be executed, the timer effect image displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is displayed in an operating display mode (see Figures 57 (2), 58 (2), and 59 (2)). This makes it possible to link the hold icon announcement due to the timer hold and the timer effect, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

It is also possible to execute a timer effect without using a variable hold icon. For example, a timer effect image can be displayed on the display screen 7a in a position that avoids the effect symbol display area 7b and the effect hold display areas 9c-9e, and the timer effect can be executed. This makes it possible to distinguish between the hold icon preview and the timer effect, and to draw the player's attention to each of the effects (preview preview effects).

The execution mode (timer performance mode) of the timer performance may be different when a timer performance is executed in a variable performance that starts when there is no timer hold notification due to a timer hold (variation performance when the timer hold is not displayed) and when a timer performance is executed in a variable performance due to the expiration of a timer hold (a hold subject to notification). For example, when a timer performance is executed in a variable performance from a state where the timer hold is not displayed, the timer performance is executed in a mode (first timer performance mode) in which a timer performance image is displayed in an area of the display screen 7a other than the display hold display area (not shown), and when a timer performance is executed in a variable performance due to the expiration of a timer hold, the timer performance may be executed in a mode (second timer performance mode) in which the variable hold icon is displayed in the shape of a timer (timer performance image), as shown in Figure 57 (2), etc. This allows for an increased variety of timer performances.

Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the timer effect processing (S5000) functions as a "period effect execution means."

[Notice at the start of fluctuation]
The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing four types of predictions at the start of fluctuation: step-up prediction (hereinafter referred to as "SU prediction"), dialogue prediction, button prediction, and special sound prediction.

The change start notice is a notice that takes place after the change effect (change display) starts, until the first stopping symbol (for example, left effect symbol 8L) stops (temporarily stops) (9 seconds in this embodiment). In other words, the execution period of the change start notice is from the start of the change until a maximum of 9 seconds has passed. The execution periods (execution times) of the SU notice, dialogue notice, button notice, and special sound notice may each be set to fall within the execution period of the change start notice (maximum 9 seconds in this embodiment), and may be the same or different for each notice.

The SU preview is a preview effect that goes through multiple stages, from the first stage to multiple stages, and suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot increases as the stages (steps) progress (increase).

As shown in Figures 60 (1) to (3), in this embodiment, an SU preview is performed by displaying effect images (step images) 901 to 903 corresponding to each stage from the first stage (step 1) to the third stage (step 3) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order from the first stage. In addition, the display size of the effect images (step images) for each stage increases (changes) in the order of the first stage (step 1), second stage (step 2), and third stage (step 3), and the display content of the effect images (step images) for each stage also differs (changes).

There are three types of SU previews: SU preview A, which ends in the first stage (see Figure 60 (1)); SU preview B, which ends in the second stage (see Figure 60 (2)); and SU preview C, which ends in the third stage (see Figure 60 (3)). The expected results increase in the order of SU preview A, SU preview B, and SU preview C. In other words, SU preview A is a preview performance with a low expectation level (low expectation preview), SU preview B is a preview performance with a medium expectation level (medium expectation preview), and SU preview C is a preview performance with a high expectation level (high expectation preview).

As shown in Figure 61, the dialogue preview is a preview effect that displays a presentation image (subtitle display) 904 on the display screen 7a that shows the lines spoken by the character in subtitle format, and the color of the subtitle display included in the presentation image 904 indicates the level of expectation.

There are three types of dialogue previews: dialogue preview A, which has a white subtitle display color (white subtitles); dialogue preview B, which has a blue subtitle display color (blue subtitles); and dialogue preview C, which has a red subtitle display color (red subtitles). The expectation level increases in the order of dialogue preview A, dialogue preview B, and dialogue preview C. In other words, dialogue preview A is a low expectation preview performance (low expectation preview), dialogue preview B is a medium expectation preview performance (medium expectation preview), and dialogue preview C is a high expectation preview performance (high expectation preview).

The button preview is a preview effect performed using the effect button, and indicates the degree of expectation based on the content (effect mode) of the operation-responsive effect executed based on the operation of the effect button. In this embodiment, the button preview is performed using the first effect button 63a. However, the button preview may also be performed using the second effect button 63b.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 62 (1), an effect image (operation instruction image) 905 consisting of an image (button image) imitating the first effect button 63a and an image (gauge image) indicating the operation acceptance period is displayed on the display screen 7a, and based on whether the first effect button 63a is operated (the first effect button detection switch 63c detects the operation of the first effect button 63a) within the operation acceptance period (for example, within 3 seconds) indicated by the gauge image included in the effect image 905, an effect image (suggestion image) suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed on the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 62 (2), the button previews include Button Preview A, which displays a preview image 906 (first suggestion image) displaying the words "Fight!" based on the operation of the first preview button 63a; Button Preview B, which displays a preview image 907 (second suggestion image) displaying the words "Chance!" based on the operation of the first preview button 63a; and Button Preview C, which displays a preview image 908 (third suggestion image) displaying the words "Hot!!" based on the operation of the first preview button 63a. The expectation level increases in the order of Button Preview A, Button Preview B, and Button Preview C. In other words, Button Preview A is a preview effect with a low expectation level (low expectation level preview), Button Preview B is a preview effect with a medium expectation level (medium expectation level preview), and Button Preview C is a preview effect with a high expectation level (high expectation level preview). Figure 62 (1) shows the appearance (medium expectation level preview) in which Preview image 907 (second suggestion image) is displayed based on the operation of the first preview button 63a.

The special sound preview is a preview effect (preview effect using sound effects) that is performed by outputting a specified sound effect from speaker 67, and the sound effect suggests a confirmed jackpot. Specifically, sound effects such as "Crrrrrrrrrr" or "Beep, beep, beep, beep." The special sound preview can only be output if the current variation effect (the variation in question) is a jackpot variation, and is not output if the variation is a miss. Therefore, the special sound preview is a preview effect with a 100% expectation rate (also called a "jackpot confirmation preview"), that is, a performance (also called a "special suggestion performance") that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (special game state) (a confirmed jackpot). Note that the preview effect suggesting a confirmed jackpot (jackpot confirmation preview) is not limited to outputting a special sound; for example, it may be a display effect that displays a special effect image (premium effect image) suggesting a confirmed jackpot.

As mentioned above, since the fluctuation start notice is an effect that can be executed as the fluctuation notice, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing in the notice effect setting processing (S4506) within the fluctuation effect start processing (S4402) to determine whether or not to execute the fluctuation start notice and the notice pattern to be used if the fluctuation start notice is executed (i.e., the notice pattern for the fluctuation start notice). Specifically, the fluctuation start notice processing (S5100) shown in Figure 45 is performed. The fluctuation start notice processing (S5100) is the processing performed following the timer effect processing (S5000) described above.

As shown in Figure 45, the fluctuation start notification process (S5100) first determines whether execution pattern A has been set as the execution pattern for the timer effect for this fluctuation effect (S5101). When executing a timer effect, the execution pattern for the timer effect is set in the aforementioned S5012, and in S5101 it is determined whether execution pattern A has been set in the aforementioned S5012. This determination can be made, for example, by referencing a specified area of RAM (setting content storage area) that stores the setting contents of the timer effect execution pattern set in S5012.

If it is determined that execution pattern A has been set as the execution pattern for the timer effect (YES in S5101), that is, if the timer effect will be executed (started) from the start of the fluctuation in this fluctuation effect, in other words, if the timer effect will be executed for approximately 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, then the fluctuation start notice determination table A shown in Figure 51 is set (S5102). On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that execution pattern A has not been set (NO in S5101), that is, if the timer effect will be executed at a timing other than the start of the fluctuation in this fluctuation effect, or if the timer effect will not be executed, then the fluctuation start notice determination table B shown in Figure 52 is set (S5103).

If the timer effect starts executing at a time other than when the fluctuation begins, it will start when the first stop symbol stops or when a reach is achieved. In this case, the timer effect, i.e., the timer effect using execution pattern B or C, will be executed for a longer period (approximately 21 seconds or approximately 20 seconds: second specified period) than the timer effect using execution pattern A (approximately 10 seconds: first specified period).

Next, in S5104, a determination is made using a random number for determining the start of fluctuation notice based on the fluctuation start notice determination table set in S5102 or S5103 (S5104). The random number for determining the start of fluctuation notice is a type of random number for determining the presentation obtained in S4501 mentioned above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 199", for example.

Change Start Notification Determination Table A is a table used when the timer effect is initiated when the change starts, and Change Start Notification Determination Table B is a table used when the timer effect is not initiated when the change starts, but is initiated when the first stop symbol stops or a reach is achieved. In other words, Change Start Notification Determination Table B is a table used when at least the timer effect is not initiated when the change starts. Note that the tables shown in Figures 51 and 52 are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 51, the variation start notice determination table A in this embodiment is a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected when executing (starting) the variable display of a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state), and is configured by assigning random number values for determining the variation start notice to each of "non-execution," "SU notice A-C," "button notice A-C," "dialogue notice A-C," and "special sound notice" for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7 (see Figures 9A and 50) in which timer effects can be executed.

As shown in Figure 52, the variation start notice determination table B in this embodiment is a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected when a variation display of a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is executed (started) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state), and is configured by assigning random numbers for determining the variation start notice to "non-execution," "SU notice A-C," "button notice A-C," "dialogue notice A-C," and "special sound notice" for special symbol variation patterns P1 to P7 in which a timer effect can be executed and special symbol variation patterns P8 to P10 in which a timer effect is not executed (see Figures 9A and 50).

In the tables shown in Figures 51 and 52, "Not Executed" means that the fluctuation start notice will not be executed (fluctuation start notice non-execution pattern), and "-" in the same table means that a random number value for determining the fluctuation start notice has not been assigned, i.e., the notice pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (is not eligible for selection).

According to fluctuation start notice determination table A of this embodiment, the rate at which the fluctuation start notice pattern (also referred to as the "fluctuation start notice pattern") is determined to be "non-execution" (fluctuation start notice non-execution pattern) is highest when the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance (the special chart fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command included in the fluctuation start command received in S4401 described above) is P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation), followed by P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), P4 and P5 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time of 75,000 ms), and P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation), in that order, and the rate is the same for P1 and P2 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time of 45,000 ms).

Also, if the fluctuation start notice is executed (if it is not determined to be "not executed"), the fluctuation start notice pattern determination ratio will be as follows:

The rate at which "SU Preview A, Dialogue Preview A or Button Preview A" is determined (the execution rate of SU Preview A, Dialogue Preview A or Button Preview A) is highest when the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation), followed by P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time 45,000 ms), P4, P5 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time 75,000 ms), P3 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time 45,000 ms), and P1, P2 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time 75,000 ms).

The rate at which "SU Preview B, Dialogue Preview B or Button Preview B" is determined (the execution rate of SU Preview B, Dialogue Preview B or Button Preview B) is the highest when the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P1, P2 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), and the rates decrease in the following order: P4, P5 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time of 75,000 ms), P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), and P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation).

The probability of being determined to be "SU Preview C, Dialogue Preview C or Button Preview C" (execution probability of SU Preview C, Dialogue Preview C or Button Preview C) is highest when the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P1 or P2 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time 75,000 ms), followed by P3 (jackpot fluctuation with fluctuation time 45,000 ms), P4, P5 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time 75,000 ms), and P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation with fluctuation time 45,000 ms), in that order, and in the case of P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation), it is not determined to be "SU Preview C, Dialogue Preview C or Button Preview C" (determination probability 0%).

The "special sound announcement" is only determined when the special chart change pattern for this change presentation is P1 to P3 (jackpot change), and the determination rate (execution rate) is the same for P1 and P2 (jackpot change with a change time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot change with a change time of 45,000 ms).

When the special chart change pattern for this change performance is P1 or P2, the probability of it being determined to be "SU Preview C, Dialogue Preview C or Button Preview C" is highest, followed by "SU Preview B, Dialogue Preview B or Button Preview B," "Special Sound Preview," and "SU Preview A, Dialogue Preview A or Button Preview A," in that order. When it is P3, the probability of it being determined to be "SU Preview C, Dialogue Preview C or Button Preview C" is highest, followed by "SU Preview B, Dialogue Preview B or Button Preview B," "Special Sound Preview," and "SU Preview A, Dialogue Preview A or Button Preview A," in that order (the probability of it being determined to be "Special Sound Preview" is the same as the probability of it being determined to be "SU Preview A, Dialogue Preview A or Button Preview A").

In addition, when the special chart change pattern for this change performance is P4 to P6, the probability of it being determined to be "SU Notice A, Dialogue Notice A or Button Notice A" is the highest, followed by "SU Notice B, Dialogue Notice B or Button Notice B," and then "SU Notice C, Dialogue Notice C or Button Notice C," in decreasing order, and it will never be determined to be "Special Sound Notice."

In addition, if the special chart change pattern for this change performance is P7, the probability of it being determined to be "SU Notice A, Dialogue Notice A or Button Notice A" is higher than the probability of it being determined to be "SU Notice B, Dialogue Notice B or Button Notice B", and it will never be determined to be "SU Notice C, Dialogue Notice C or Button Notice C" or "Special Sound Notice".

On the other hand, according to the fluctuation start notice determination table B of this embodiment (see Figure 52), the rate at which the fluctuation start notice pattern is determined to be "not executed" (fluctuation start notice non-execution pattern) is higher for all fluctuation patterns than in the fluctuation start notice determination table A (see Figure 51). In other words, in this fluctuation effect, if the timer effect is not started to be executed at least at the start of the fluctuation, the rate at which the fluctuation start notice is executed will be lower than when the timer effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, in the variation start notice determination table B, if the special chart variation pattern for this variation effect is P9 or P10 (no-reach shortened miss variation), the variation start notice pattern will always be determined to be "non-execution" (variation start notice non-execution pattern), and in the case of a shortened miss variation, the variation notice will not be executed. Also, if the special chart variation pattern for this variation effect is P8 (no-reach miss variation), the variation start notice pattern will always be determined to be "SU notice A, dialogue notice A, or button notice A."

In addition, in the fluctuation start notice determination table B, if the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P1 to P7 (reach or above), the determination rates for "SU notice A, dialogue notice A or button notice A," "SU notice B, dialogue notice B or button notice B," "SU notice C, dialogue notice C or button notice C," and "special sound notice" are slightly different from those in the fluctuation start notice determination table A (sometimes the same, sometimes different), but the high-low relationship between the respective determination rates is the same as in the fluctuation start notice determination table A.

According to the above-described fluctuation start notice determination tables A and B, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: "SU notice A, line notice A or button notice A," "SU notice B, line notice B or button notice B," "SU notice C, line notice C or button notice C," and "special sound notice." In other words, "SU notice A, line notice A and button notice A" are low-expectation notices with relatively low expectation, "SU notice B, line notice B and button notice B" are medium-expectation notices with intermediate expectation, "SU notice C, line notice C and button notice C" are high-expectation notices with relatively high expectation, and "special sound notice" is a confirmed jackpot notice with 100% expectation. Note that if 100% expectation is included in high expectation, then the special sound notice (confirmed jackpot notice) can be considered a type of high-expectation notice.

Then, during this fluctuation performance (fluctuation period), the execution rate of the fluctuation start notice is configured to differ between when a timer performance according to execution pattern A is executed (the timer performance starts when the fluctuation starts) and when a timer performance according to execution pattern A is not executed (the timer performance does not start when the fluctuation starts) (see Figures 51 and 52). That is, during the period from the start of fluctuation to when the first stop symbol stops (also referred to as the "early fluctuation period"), the fluctuation start notice can be executed at different rates when the timer performance is running and when it is not running. Specifically, the execution rate of the fluctuation start notice is configured to be higher when the timer performance starts when the fluctuation starts compared to when the timer performance is not started when the fluctuation starts. That is, when a timer performance is running during the early fluctuation period, the fluctuation start notice can be executed at a higher rate compared to when the timer performance is not running during the early fluctuation period.

This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the status of the preview effect when the fluctuation effect (fluctuation display) begins, such as whether or not a fluctuation start preview is executed, the type of preview (content of the suggestion) if one is executed, and whether or not the fluctuation start preview overlaps with the timer effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, for timer effects (low expectation timer effects) executed during the early fluctuation period, the fluctuation start preview is more likely to overlap (be executed at the same time), making it possible to enhance the effect of the presentation during the early fluctuation period.

In addition, the system may be configured so that the rate at which the fluctuation start notice is executed is lower when the timer effect is started at the start of fluctuation than when the timer effect is not started at the start of fluctuation. In this case, it is possible to more easily attract the player's interest in the timer effect that is performed during the early fluctuation period.

Furthermore, focusing on the execution period of the timer effect, the execution rate of the start of fluctuation notice is configured to differ between cases where the timer effect is executed for approximately 10 seconds (first predetermined period) from the start of fluctuation in this fluctuation effect (fluctuation period) (execution pattern A) and cases where the timer effect is executed for approximately 21 seconds (second predetermined period) from the stop (temporary stop) of the first stop symbol or for approximately 20 seconds (second predetermined period) from the establishment of a reach (execution pattern B or C). Specifically, the execution rate of the start of fluctuation notice is configured to be higher when the timer effect has a relatively short execution period (first predetermined period) (when the timer effect is executed using execution pattern A) than when the timer effect has a relatively long execution period (second predetermined period) (when the timer effect is executed using execution pattern B or C). This makes it more likely that the start of fluctuation notices will be executed overlapping (simultaneously) for timer effects with relatively short execution periods (timer effects with low expectation), thereby increasing gaming enjoyment.

In addition, the system may be configured so that the execution rate of the fluctuation start notice is lower when the timer effect has a relatively short execution period (first predetermined period) than when the timer effect has a relatively long execution period (second predetermined period). In this case, it is possible to more easily attract players' interest in timer effects with relatively short execution periods.

Returning to Figure 45, if the result of the judgment in S5104 is that the fluctuation start notice will not be executed (NO in S5105), this processing ends without processing S5106; if the fluctuation start notice will be executed (YES in S5105), the fluctuation start notice pattern determined (selected) based on fluctuation start notice determination table A or B is set (S5106), and this processing ends.

The fluctuation start warning pattern set in S5106 is included in the fluctuation performance start command set in the aforementioned S4507, and when this fluctuation performance start command is sent to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM of the image control board 100 image data for the fluctuation start warning corresponding to the fluctuation start warning pattern identified based on the received fluctuation performance start command, and executes a fluctuation start warning based on the read image data (one of the warning displays shown in Figures 60 to 62) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Notice when reach is achieved]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing three types of predictions when a reach is achieved: a first character prediction, a second character prediction, and a group prediction.

The reach-established notice is a notice that occurs when, after the change effect (change display) begins, the first stopping symbol (e.g., left effect symbol 8L) and the second stopping symbol (e.g., right effect symbol 8R) stop (temporarily stop) on a reach symbol (e.g., symbols with the same number on both sides), i.e., when a reach is established (when a reach is established).

The first character preview is a preview effect in which a preview image (character image) 909 representing a specified character (for example, character A) is displayed on the display screen 7a when a reach is achieved, as shown in Figure 63 (1).

The second character preview is a preview effect in which a presentation image (character image) 910 representing a specified character (e.g., character B) is displayed on the display screen 7a when a reach is achieved, as shown in Figure 63 (2).

As shown in Figure 63 (3), the group preview is a preview effect in which a presentation image (group image) 911 representing a group of specified characters is displayed on the display screen 7a when a reach is achieved. In this embodiment, the group preview is performed in such a way that the presentation image (group image) 911 moves (moves) behind the presentation pattern 8 from the right edge to the left edge of the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, of the predictions made when a reach is achieved, the first character prediction is a low expectation prediction, the second character prediction is a medium expectation prediction, and the group prediction is a high expectation prediction.

As mentioned above, since the reach-established notification is an effect that can be executed as the relevant variable notification (pre-notification effect), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing in the notification effect setting process (S4506) of the variable effect start process (S4402) to determine whether or not to execute the reach-established notification and the notification pattern (i.e., the notification pattern for the reach-established notification) if it is executed. Specifically, the reach-established notification process (S5200) shown in Figure 46 is performed. The reach-established notification process (S5200) is the process that is performed following the previously mentioned variable start notification process (S5100).

As shown in Figure 46, the reach-establishment notification process (S5200) first determines whether a start-of-variation notification pattern has been set for the current variation effect, i.e., whether a start-of-variation notification will be executed (S5201). This determination can be made, for example, by referencing a specified area of RAM (setting content storage area) that stores the setting content of the start-of-variation notification pattern set by the aforementioned S5106.

If it is determined in S5201 that a fluctuation start notification pattern has not been set (no fluctuation start notification will be executed) (NO in S5201), the reach establishment notification determination table A shown in Figure 53 (1) is set (S5202).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a fluctuation start notification pattern has been set (a fluctuation start notification will be executed) (YES in S5201), it is determined whether the fluctuation start notification pattern is a high expectation notification or a confirmed jackpot notification (S5203). The high expectation notification here is either SU notification C, dialogue notification C, or button notification C (see Figures 51 and 52).

If, as a result of the judgment in S5203, it is determined that the set fluctuation start prediction pattern is neither a high expectation prediction nor a confirmed jackpot prediction (NO in S5203), i.e., if it is a low expectation prediction or a medium expectation prediction, the reach-established prediction determination table B shown in Figure 53 (2) is set (S5204), and if it is determined to be a high expectation prediction or a confirmed jackpot prediction (YES in S5203), the reach-established prediction determination table C shown in Figure 53 (3) is set (S5205).

Next, in S5206, a judgment is made using a random number for determining the notification when a reach is established, based on the notification determination table for when a reach is established that was set in S5202, S5204, or S5205 (S5206). The random number for determining the notification when a reach is established is a type of random number for determining the presentation obtained in S4501 mentioned above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", for example.

Reach establishment notification determination table A is a table used when a fluctuation start notification is not executed, reach establishment notification determination table B is a table used when a low expectation notification or a medium expectation notification is executed as a fluctuation start notification, and reach establishment notification determination table C is a table used when a high expectation notification or a confirmed jackpot notification is executed as a fluctuation start notification. Note that the tables shown in Figures 53 (1) to (3) are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figures 53 (1) and (2), the reach-established notice determination tables A and B in this embodiment are special symbol change patterns that can be selected when a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) change display is executed (started) in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state), and are configured by assigning random numbers for determining the reach-established notice to "non-execution," "first character notice," "second character notice," and "group notice," respectively, for special symbol change patterns P1 to P7 (see Figure 9A) in which a reach effect (NM reach effect or SP reach effect) is executed.

As shown in Figure 53 (3), the reach-established notice determination table C in this embodiment is a special symbol change pattern that can be selected when a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) change display is executed (started) in a low-probability, low-base state (non-time-saving state), and is configured by assigning random numbers for determining the reach-established notice to each of "non-execution," "first character notice," "second character notice," and "group notice" for special symbol change patterns P1 to P6 (see Figure 9A) in which the SP reach performance is executed.

In the tables shown in Figures 53 (1) to (3), "Not Executed" means that the notification will not be executed when a reach is achieved (a pattern in which the notification will not be executed when a reach is achieved), and "-" in the same table means that a random number value for determining the notification when a reach is achieved has not been assigned, meaning that the notification pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (is not eligible for selection).

According to Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table A of this embodiment, the rate at which the notification pattern for the Reach Establishment notification (also referred to as the "Reach Establishment Notification Pattern") is determined to be "Not Executed" (Reach Establishment Notification Non-Execution Pattern) is highest when the special chart change pattern for this change presentation (the special chart change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command included in the change start command received in S4401 described above) is P7 (NM Reach Miss Change), followed by P6 (SP Reach Miss Change with a change time of 45,000 ms), P4 and P5 (SP Reach Miss Change with a change time of 75,000 ms), and P1 to P3 (jackpot change), and the rate is the same for P1 and P2 (jackpot change with a change time of 75,000 ms) and P3 (jackpot change with a change time of 45,000 ms).

Also, if the reach confirmation is executed (if it is not determined to be "not executed"), the probability of determining the reach confirmation pattern is as follows:

The rate at which a "First Character Announcement" is determined (the rate at which a First Character Announcement is executed) is highest when the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P7 (NM Missed Reach fluctuation), followed by P6 (SP Missed Reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), P4, P5 (SP Missed Reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms), P3 (jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), and P1, P2 (jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms), in that order, with the rates decreasing accordingly.

The rate at which a "Second Character Announcement" is determined (the rate at which a Second Character Announcement is executed) is the highest whether the special chart fluctuation pattern for this fluctuation performance is P1, P2 (jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms) or P3 (jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), and the rate decreases in the following order: P4, P5 (SP reach miss fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms), P6 (SP reach miss fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms), and P7 (NM reach miss fluctuation).

The rate at which a "Group Prediction" is decided (rate at which a Group Prediction is executed) is highest when the special chart change pattern for this change performance is P1 or P2 (jackpot change with a change time of 75,000 ms), followed by P3 (jackpot change with a change time of 45,000 ms), P4, P5 (SP reach miss change with a change time of 75,000 ms), and P6 (SP reach miss change with a change time of 45,000 ms), in which case the rate decreases, and in the case of P7 (NM reach miss change), it is not decided as a "Group Prediction" (decision rate 0%).

When the special chart change pattern for this change performance is P1 to P3, the probability of it being determined as "Group Preview" is highest, followed by "Second Character Preview" and "First Character Preview" in decreasing order; when it is P4 to P6, the probability of it being determined as "First Character Preview" is highest, followed by "Second Character Preview" and "Group Preview" in decreasing order; when it is P7, the probability of it being determined as "First Character Preview" is higher than the probability of it being determined as "Second Character Preview", and it is never determined as "Group Preview".

On the other hand, according to Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B of this embodiment (see Figure 53 (2)), the rate at which the Reach Establishment Notification pattern is determined to be "non-execution" (reach establishment notification non-execution pattern) is higher for all fluctuation patterns than in Fluctuation Start Notification Determination Table A (see Figure 53 (1)). In other words, in this fluctuation presentation, if a low expectation notification or medium expectation notification is executed as the fluctuation start notification, the rate at which the Reach Establishment Notification is subsequently executed is lower than when the fluctuation start notification is not executed.

In addition, in Reach Establishment Prediction Determination Table B, when a Reach Establishment Prediction is executed (when it is not determined to be "not executed"), the determination rates for "First Character Prediction" and "Second Character Prediction" are lower than in Reach Establishment Prediction Determination Table A, and the determination rate for "Group Prediction" is the same as the determination rate for "Group Prediction" in Reach Establishment Prediction Determination Table A, and the high-low relationship between the determination rates for each prediction is the same as in Reach Establishment Prediction Determination Table A.

In addition, according to Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table C of this embodiment (see Figure 53 (3)), the rate at which the Reach Establishment Notification Pattern is determined to be "Not Executed" (Reach Establishment Notification Non-Executed Pattern) is higher for all special chart fluctuation patterns P1 to P6 than in Change Start Notification Determination Table A (see Figure 53 (1)), and when compared with Change Start Notification Determination Table B (see Figure 53 (2)), it is the same as Reach Establishment Notification Determination Table B for special chart fluctuation patterns P1 to P3, but is higher than in Change Start Notification Determination Table B for special chart fluctuation patterns P4 to P6.

In other words, in this variation effect, if a high expectation prediction or a confirmed jackpot prediction is executed as the variation start prediction (if an SP reach is confirmed), the rate at which a reach establishment prediction is executed thereafter will be lower than when a variation start prediction is not executed (see Figures 53 (1) and (3)), and if this variation effect is an SP reach miss variation prediction (SP reach miss variation effect), the rate at which a reach establishment prediction is executed in that variation effect will be lower than when a low expectation prediction or a medium expectation prediction is executed as the variation start prediction (see Figures 53 (2) and (3)).

In Reach Establishment Notice Determination Table C, when a Reach Establishment Notice is executed (when not determined to be "not executed"), the determination rate for "First Character Notice" is lower than Reach Establishment Notice Determination Table B for all special chart variation patterns P1 to P6. On the other hand, the determination rate for "Second Character Notice" is higher than Reach Establishment Notice Determination Table B and the same as Reach Establishment Notice Determination Table A for all special chart variation patterns P1 to P6, and the determination rate for "Group Notice" is higher than Reach Establishment Notice Determination Tables A and B for special chart variation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot variation), and the same as Reach Establishment Notice Determination Tables A and B for special chart variation patterns P4 to P6 (SP Reach Miss Variation).

In other words, in this fluctuation performance, if a high expectation prediction or a guaranteed jackpot prediction is executed as the fluctuation start prediction, the probability that a first character prediction will be executed as the reach formation prediction thereafter will be lower than either when the fluctuation start prediction is not executed or when a low expectation prediction or a medium expectation prediction is executed as the fluctuation start prediction.

In addition, in this variation presentation, when a high expectation prediction or a confirmed jackpot prediction is executed as the variation start prediction, the rate at which a second character prediction is subsequently executed as the reach formation prediction is the same as when a variation start prediction is not executed (see Figure 53 (1)), and is higher than when a low expectation prediction or a medium expectation prediction is executed as the variation start prediction (see Figure 53 (2)).

In addition, in this fluctuation effect, if a high expectation prediction or a confirmed jackpot prediction is executed as the fluctuation start prediction, the rate at which a group prediction is then executed as the reach formation prediction, if the fluctuation effect is a jackpot fluctuation prediction (also called a "jackpot fluctuation effect"), will be higher than either when the fluctuation start prediction is not executed (see Figure 53 (1)) or when a low expectation prediction or a medium expectation prediction is executed as the fluctuation start prediction (see Figure 53 (2)).

According to the above-mentioned Reach Formation Notification Determination Tables A to C, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of "First Character Notification," "Second Character Notification," and "Group Notification." In other words, "First Character Notification" is a low-expectation notification with a relatively low expectation, "Second Character Notification" is a medium-expectation notification with a medium expectation, and "Group Notification" is a high-expectation notification with a relatively high expectation.

Furthermore, if a high-expectation notice or a confirmed jackpot notice is executed as the fluctuation start notice at the start of a fluctuation effect (fluctuation display), the rate at which a low-expectation notice is executed as the reach-established notice when a reach is subsequently established is configured to be lower than either when the fluctuation start notice is not executed or when a low-expectation notice or a medium-expectation notice is executed as the fluctuation start notice. In other words, if a fluctuation start notice (first suggestion notice) with a higher expectation (high expectation) than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is executed at the start of a fluctuation effect (first specified time during the fluctuation period), the execution of a reach-established notice (second suggestion notice) with a lower expectation (low expectation) than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is suppressed when the reach of that fluctuation effect is established (second specified time during the fluctuation period).

This means that when a high expectation notification is executed at the start of a fluctuation during a single fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot, which is heightened by the high expectation notification, is not frequently diminished by the subsequent notification when a reach is achieved, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the reach-formed notification determination table C, the determination rate for the first character notification (low expectation notification) may be set to 0%, so that if a high expectation notification is executed at the start of a fluctuation, a low expectation notification will not be executed as a reach-formed notification. In other words, by setting the execution rate of a low expectation notification when a reach is formed to 0%, the execution of a low expectation reach-formed notification (second suggestive effect) may be suppressed. This also makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by not damaging the player's sense of expectation that is heightened by a high expectation notification at the start of a fluctuation.

Furthermore, if a low expectation or medium expectation notification is executed as the fluctuation start notification at the start of a fluctuation effect, the rate at which a low expectation or medium expectation notification is executed as the reach notification when a subsequent reach is achieved is configured to be lower than when the fluctuation start notification is not executed. In other words, if a fluctuation start notification (first suggestion notification) with a medium expectation (predetermined expectation) or an expectation lower than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is executed at the start of a fluctuation effect (first specified time within the fluctuation period), the execution of a notification notification that suggests the same expectation as the fluctuation start notification is suppressed when a reach is achieved for that fluctuation effect (second specified time within the fluctuation period).

As a result, when a low or medium expectation fluctuation start notice is executed during one fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), it becomes less likely that a reach-achi notice with similar suggestive content (expectation) will be executed, making it less likely that players will feel disappointed or bored by repeated notices with low expectation.

Furthermore, if a high expectation notice is executed as the fluctuation start notice at the start of a fluctuation effect, and if the fluctuation effect is a jackpot fluctuation effect, the rate at which a high expectation notice (group notice) is executed as the reach-established notice when a subsequent reach is established is configured to be higher than either when the fluctuation start notice is not executed or when a low expectation notice or a medium expectation notice is executed as the fluctuation start notice. In other words, if a fluctuation start notice (first suggestion notice) with a higher expectation (high expectation) than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is executed at the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect (first specified time within the fluctuation period), the execution of a reach-established notice (second suggestion notice) with a higher expectation (high expectation) than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is promoted when the reach of the fluctuation effect is established (second specified time within the fluctuation period).

As a result, when a high expectation notification is executed at the start of a fluctuation during one fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot, which is heightened by that high expectation notification, can also be heightened by the subsequent notification (high expectation notification) when a reach is achieved, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during one fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), the probability of a reach-achieved notification being executed is higher (the reach-achieved notification is more likely to be executed) when the fluctuation start notification is not executed compared to when the fluctuation start notification is executed (see Figure 53 (1) to (3)). This allows players to be interested in the possibility of a reach being achieved (a reach occurring) even if the fluctuation start notification is not executed.

Returning to Figure 46, if the result of the determination in S5206 is that a reach-established notification will not be executed (NO in S5207), this processing ends without processing S5208; if a reach-established notification will be executed (YES in S5207), the reach-established notification pattern determined (selected) based on one of reach-established notification determination tables A to C is set (S5208), and this processing ends.

The reach-established warning pattern set in S5208 is included in the variable effect start command set in the aforementioned S4507, and when this variable effect start command is sent to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM of the image control board 100 image data for the reach-established warning corresponding to the reach-established warning pattern identified based on the received variable effect start command, and executes a reach-established warning (one of the warning displays shown in Figures 63 (1) to (3)) based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[SP development notice]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing three types of SP development notices: title notice (white), title notice (red), and title notice (gold).

The SP development notice is a notice that is given when the reach effect, which takes place after the start of the change effect (change display) and the reach effect has been established, develops (transitions) from an NM reach effect to an SP reach effect (when SP develops).

As mentioned above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with multiple types of SP reach effects with different stories (presentation patterns) (for example, SP reach effects for story A1, SP reach effects for story A2, etc.). In this embodiment, each of the multiple types of SP reach effects with different stories is given a title (title) according to the story.

As shown in Figures 64 (1) to (3), the title preview is a preview effect that is performed during the progression of the variable effect when, after a reach is achieved and it develops (transitions) to an SP reach, a performance image (title display) 912 indicating the title of the SP reach effect that is about to be executed (started) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see Figure 64 (2)), and the color of the title display (text) included in the performance image 912 indicates the degree of expectation.

There are three types of title previews: Title Preview A, which has a white title display; Title Preview B, which has a red title display; and Title Preview C, which has a gold title display. The expectation level increases in the order of Title Preview A, Title Preview B, and Title Preview C. In other words, Title Preview A is a preview performance with a low expectation level (low expectation preview), Title Preview B is a preview performance with a medium expectation level (medium expectation preview), and Title Preview C is a preview performance with a high expectation level (high expectation preview).

As mentioned above, since the SP development notice is an effect that can be executed as the variable notice (pre-notification effect), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing in the notice effect setting process (S4506) of the variable effect start process (S4402) to determine whether or not to execute the SP development notice and the notice pattern to be used if the SP development notice is executed (i.e., the notice pattern of the SP development notice). Specifically, the SP development notice processing (S5300) shown in Figure 47 is performed. The SP development notice processing (S5300) is the processing that is performed following the previously mentioned reach establishment notice processing (S5200).

As shown in Figure 47, the SP development notification process (S5300) is basically the same as the previously mentioned reach establishment notification process (S5200). That is, the SP development notification process (S5300) also first determines whether the start-of-variation notification pattern for this variation effect was set in the previously mentioned S5106 (whether to execute the start-of-variation notification) (S5301).

As a result, if it is determined that a fluctuation start notification pattern has not been set (fluctuation start notification will not be executed) (NO in S5301), SP development notification determination table A shown in FIG. 54 (1) is set (S5302); if it is determined that a fluctuation start notification pattern has been set (fluctuation start notification will be executed) (YES in S5301) and the fluctuation start notification pattern is neither a high expectation notification nor a confirmed jackpot notification (it is a low expectation notification or a medium expectation notification) (NO in S5303), SP development notification determination table B shown in FIG. 54 (2) is set (S5304); if it is determined that it is a high expectation notification or a confirmed jackpot notification (YES in S5303), SP development notification determination table C shown in FIG. 54 (3) is set (S5305).

Next, in S5306, a determination is made using a random number for determining the SP development notice, based on the SP development notice determination table set in S5302, S5304, or S5305 (S5306). The random number for determining the SP development notice is a type of random number for determining the presentation obtained in S4501 mentioned above, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 99," for example.

SP development notice determination table A is a table used when a fluctuation start notice is not executed, SP development notice determination table B is a table used when a low expectation notice or a medium expectation notice is executed as a fluctuation start notice, and SP development notice determination table C is a table used when a high expectation notice or a confirmed jackpot notice is executed as a fluctuation start notice. Note that the tables shown in Figures 54 (1) to (3) are merely examples, and the table structure is not limited to this embodiment.

As shown in Figures 54 (1) to (3), the SP development notice determination tables A to C of this embodiment are special symbol change patterns that can be selected when a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) change display is executed (started) in a low probability, low base state (non-time-saving state), and are configured by assigning random number values for determining the SP development notice to "Non-execution," "Title Notice A," "Title Notice B," and "Title Notice C," respectively, for special symbol change patterns P1 to P6 (see Figure 9A) in which the SP reach performance is executed.

In the tables shown in Figures 54 (1) to (3), "Not Executed" means that the SP advancement notice will not be executed (SP advancement notice non-execution pattern), and "-" in the same table means that a random number value for determining the SP advancement notice has not been assigned, meaning that the notice pattern corresponding to "-" will not be selected (is not eligible for selection).

In the SP development prediction determination tables A to C shown in Figures 54 (1) to (3), for special chart variation patterns P1 to P6, the number of random number values assigned to each prediction pattern of "Non-execution," "Title Prediction A" (low expectation prediction), "Title Prediction B" (medium expectation prediction), and "Title Prediction C" (high expectation prediction) (the determination rate of each prediction pattern) is the same as the number of random number values assigned to each prediction pattern of "Non-execution," "First character prediction" (low expectation prediction), "Second character prediction" (medium expectation prediction), and "Group prediction" (high expectation prediction) (the determination rate of each prediction pattern) (the special chart variation patterns P1 to P6) in the reach formation prediction determination tables A to C shown in Figures 53 (1) to (3).

For this reason, the determination of each preview pattern using SP development preview determination tables A to C can be said to be the same as the determination of each preview pattern using reach establishment preview determination tables A to C (reach establishment preview determination tables A and B exclude special chart variation pattern P7). Furthermore, the same effect as the reach establishment preview described above can also be obtained for SP development previews.

In other words, when a high expectation notification is executed at the start of a fluctuation during one fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), it is possible to prevent the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot, which is heightened by the high expectation notification, from being damaged by subsequent SP development notifications, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if a low expectation level announcement or a medium expectation level announcement is executed as the fluctuation start announcement at the start of a fluctuation presentation, the rate at which a low expectation level announcement (title announcement A) or a medium expectation level announcement (title announcement B) is executed as the SP development announcement during the subsequent SP development is configured to be lower than when the fluctuation start announcement is not executed. In other words, if a medium expectation level (predetermined expectation level) or a fluctuation start announcement (first suggestion announcement) with an expectation level lower than the medium expectation level (predetermined expectation level) is executed at the start of a fluctuation presentation (first specified time during the fluctuation period), the execution of an announcement announcement suggesting an expectation level similar to that of the fluctuation start announcement is suppressed during the SP development of that fluctuation presentation (second specified time during the fluctuation period).

As a result, when a low or medium expectation fluctuation start announcement is executed during one fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), it becomes less likely that an SP development announcement with similar suggestive content (expectation) will be executed, making it less likely that players will feel disappointed or bored due to repeated announcements with low expectation.

Furthermore, if a high expectation notice is executed as the fluctuation start notice at the start of a fluctuation effect, and if the fluctuation effect is a jackpot fluctuation effect, the rate at which a high expectation notice (title notice C) is executed as the SP development notice during the subsequent SP development is configured to be higher than either when the fluctuation start notice is not executed or when a low expectation notice or a medium expectation notice is executed as the fluctuation start notice. In other words, if a fluctuation start notice (first suggestion notice) with a higher expectation (high expectation) than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is executed at the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect (first predetermined time during the fluctuation period), the execution of an SP development notice (second suggestion notice) with a higher expectation (high expectation) than the medium expectation (predetermined expectation) is promoted during the SP development of the fluctuation effect (second predetermined time during the fluctuation period).

As a result, when a high expectation notification is executed at the start of a fluctuation during one fluctuation presentation (fluctuation period), the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot, which is heightened by that high expectation notification, can also be heightened by subsequent SP development notifications (high expectation notifications), making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during one variation presentation (variation period), the probability of the SP development notification being executed is higher (the SP development notification is more likely to be executed) when the variation start notification is not executed compared to when the variation start notification is executed (see Figure 54 (1) to (3)). This allows players to be interested in the development of an SP reach even if the variation start notification is not executed.

Returning to Figure 47, if the result of the determination in S5306 is that the SP development notification will not be executed (NO in S5307), this processing ends without processing S5308. If the SP development notification will be executed (YES in S5307), the SP development notification pattern determined (selected) based on one of the SP development notification determination tables A to C is set (S5308), and this processing ends.

The SP development warning pattern set in S5308 is included in the variable performance start command set in the aforementioned S4507, and when this variable performance start command is sent to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the SP development warning corresponding to the SP development warning pattern identified based on the received variable performance start command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes the SP development warning (the warning display shown in Figure 64 (2)) based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment described above, when a variable effect starts, timer effect execution pattern A is set at S5012 of the timer effect processing (S5000) (see Figures 44 and 50 (4)), a SU notification, dialogue notification, button notification or special sound notification pattern (see Figures 45 and 51) is set as the variable start notification pattern at S5106 of the variable start notification processing (S5100), and a first character notification, second character notification or group notification pattern (see Figures 46 and 53 (2), (3)) may be set as the reach establishment notification pattern at S5208 of the reach establishment notification processing (S5200).

In this case, as shown in Figure 65, a timer effect starts when the variation effect starts, and the timer effect runs for approximately 10 seconds to indicate the time remaining until a reach is achieved. During the execution period of the timer effect, an SU notification, a dialogue notification, a button notification, or a special sound notification (special sound notification is only used in the case of a jackpot variation) is executed as a notification at the start of the variation (see Figure 65 (1)), and when the execution period of the timer effect (the remaining time displayed in the timer effect) has elapsed (the timer display reaches 00:00), a first character notification, a second character notification, or a group notification is executed (see Figure 65 (2)).

In this type of presentation, the fluctuation start notice executed during the execution period of the timer presentation and the reach-to-win notice executed after the timer presentation period has elapsed (after the time displayed in the timer presentation has elapsed) may suggest the same expected value (e.g., both are low-expectation notices), or the fluctuation start notice may suggest a higher expected value than the reach-to-win notice, or the reach-to-win notice may suggest a higher expected value than the fluctuation start notice (e.g., one is a medium-expectation notice and the other is a high-expectation notice) (see Figures 51 and 53 (2) and (3)). Furthermore, when a timer presentation is executed, the display pattern for the timer presentation is set in S5014 of the timer presentation processing (S5000) (see Figures 44 and 50 (5)), and the expected value is also suggested by the display pattern (in this embodiment, the color of the timer display). Therefore, the timer presentation, the fluctuation start notice executed during the timer presentation, and the reach-to-win notice executed after the timer presentation each effectively heighten the player's anticipation for a jackpot. This will attract the player's interest in the timer effect, the notification of when the variation starts during the timer effect, and the notification of when a reach is achieved after the timer effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a variation effect (SP reach variation effect) is executed based on a special chart variation pattern (P1, P2, P4, or P5) with a variation time of 75,000 ms, the variation effect may include a timer effect, a variation start notice, a reach-established notice, an SP development notice, and an operation instruction effect (first operation instruction effect or second operation instruction effect). The timer effect, variation start notice, reach-established notice, and SP development notice, among other variation notices, suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, and the operation instruction effect (first operation instruction effect or second operation instruction effect) suggests the likelihood of a jackpot in the event of a jackpot. Therefore, depending on the execution status of each of these effects, it is possible to effectively heighten the player's anticipation for a jackpot or a high-probability state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the timer effect, variation start notice, reach-established notice, SP development notice, and operation instruction effect, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Here, the effect control microcomputer 91, which executes the aforementioned fluctuation start notification process (S5100), reach establishment notification process (S5200), and SP development notification process (S5300), functions as a "suggested effect execution means," a "first suggested effect execution means," a "second suggested effect execution means," and a "special suggested effect execution means."

The above describes an example embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configurations, for example, can be adopted. Note that the above example and the following configurations (modifications) can be implemented in any suitable combination as long as they do not contradict each other.

In the above-described embodiment, a button preview was provided using the first effect button 63a to notify the start of a change, but a button preview may also be provided using the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b to notify the establishment of a reach or the development of an SP.

In the above-described embodiment, the button previews provided were: low-expectation button preview A, which displays a presentation image 906 displaying the word "Fight!" based on operation of the first presentation button 63a; medium-expectation button preview B, which displays a presentation image 907 displaying the word "Chance!" based on operation of the first presentation button 63a; and high-expectation button preview C, which displays a presentation image 908 displaying the word "Hot!!" based on operation of the first presentation button 63a (see Figures 51, 52, 62, etc.). In contrast, a button preview (special suggestion effect) for a confirmed jackpot may also be provided, which displays a presentation image displaying the letter "V" (also referred to as a "confirmed jackpot suggestion image" or "special suggestion image"), indicating a confirmed jackpot, based on operation of the first presentation button 63a.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, a jackpot confirmation notice (special suggestion effect) was provided as a notice at the start of fluctuation, suggesting that the game would be controlled to a jackpot game state (special game state). However, a jackpot confirmation notice (special suggestion effect) may also be provided as a notice when a reach is achieved or when an SP develops (second suggestion effect).

Here, in one variation effect (variation period), if a jackpot confirmation notification is not executed as the variation start notification (a special suggestion notification is not executed at the first predetermined time), a jackpot confirmation notification may be executed as the reach-to-win notification (a special suggestion notification is executed at the second predetermined time), and if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed as the variation start notification (a special suggestion notification is executed at the first predetermined time), a jackpot confirmation notification may not be executed as the reach-to-win notification (a special suggestion notification is not executed at the second predetermined time). In other words, if a jackpot confirmation notification pattern is not set in S5106 of the variation start notification processing (S5100), a jackpot confirmation notification pattern may be set in S5208 of the reach-to-win notification processing (S5200), and if a jackpot confirmation notification pattern is set in S5106, a jackpot confirmation notification pattern may not be set in S5208.

With this configuration, when a jackpot confirmation notification is executed as a notification when a reach is reached, the jackpot confirmation notification is not executed in the notification when the fluctuation starts before the reach is reached, so it is possible to give the player the same sense of elation when a jackpot confirmation notification is executed when a reach is reached without compromising the effect of the jackpot confirmation notification as a notification when a reach is reached.

Furthermore, in this configuration, if the aforementioned button notification (special suggestion effect) of the jackpot confirmation mode is provided as the variation start notification, when the jackpot confirmation notification (special suggestion effect) is executed as the reach-to-win notification, the button notification of the jackpot confirmation mode will not be executed as the variation start notification. In other words, if a button notification is executed as the variation start notification and a jackpot confirmation notification is executed as the reach-to-win notification, the button notification executed as the variation start notification will be a button notification other than the jackpot confirmation mode (for example, any of the aforementioned button notifications A-C). Furthermore, when any of the aforementioned button notifications A-C is executed as the variation start notification, when a presentation image (suggestion image) suggesting the expected level is displayed in response to the operation of the presentation button related to that button notification, i.e., at the operation response time corresponding to the operation of the presentation button, the jackpot confirmation suggestion image will not be displayed (i.e., the jackpot confirmation notification will not be executed), and the jackpot confirmation notification will be executed when the reach-to-win mode is established after the execution time of that button notification (the operation response time corresponding to the operation of the presentation button).

In this way, during one variation effect (variation period), even if the button preview at the start of the variation does not display a confirmed jackpot image in response to the operation of the effect button (even if the confirmed jackpot preview is not executed), the confirmed jackpot preview can be executed when a reach is achieved thereafter. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration when the confirmed jackpot preview is executed later than the timing of the effect button operation (operation response time).

Note that while we have described a configuration that allows a jackpot confirmation notification to be executed as a reach-established notification, the same applies to a configuration that allows a jackpot confirmation notification to be executed as an SP development notification. In other words, in one variation presentation (variation period), if a jackpot confirmation notification is not executed as a variation start notification (at a first predetermined time), a jackpot confirmation notification may be executed as an SP development notification (at a second predetermined time); and if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed as a variation start notification (at a first predetermined time), it is possible to configure the system not to execute a jackpot confirmation notification as an SP development notification (at a second predetermined time). This also achieves the same effect as when a jackpot confirmation notification is executed as a reach-established notification, as described above.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the pre-determination based on the starting ball scoring is performed by reading the most recent acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special chart reserve memory unit and judging (pre-determination) the read acquired random number value (acquired information). However, the method of pre-determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special chart reserve memory unit, an area (acquired information storage means) for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined (i.e., the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball scoring) may be provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or the sub-control unit 90, and the acquired information stored in this storage area (pre-determination storage unit) may be judged (pre-determination). In this case, by storing the results of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or the sub-control unit 90, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used in the pre-determination (acquired information stored in a separate storage area).

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a control process was used in which the second special symbol reserved is consumed in priority over the first special symbol reserved, a so-called control process of special symbol 2 priority consumption. However, this is not limited to this, and a control process in which the first special symbol reserved is consumed in priority over the second special symbol reserved, a so-called control process of special symbol 1 priority consumption, may also be used. Furthermore, without setting a priority between the consumption of the first special symbol reserved and the consumption of the second special symbol reserved, a control process in which the first special symbol reserved and the second special symbol reserved are consumed in order from the oldest stored one, a so-called control process of consumption in order of entry (storage order), may also be used. Furthermore, a control process in which the consumption of the first special symbol reserved and the consumption of the second special symbol reserved can be executed in parallel may also be used.

While the above-described embodiment illustrates the application of the present invention to a pachinko gaming machine that determines whether to activate the probability fluctuation function based on the type of jackpot symbol, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine (so-called "V-guaranteed machine") that has a specific area (V area) in the large prize entry port (V attacker) as a probability variable activation port, and determines whether to activate the probability fluctuation function based on whether the gaming ball passes through the specific area (V passage) during jackpot play. Alternatively, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine (so-called "type 1/2 hybrid machine") that has a specific area (V area) in the large prize entry port that can be entered when the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a small hit, and if a gaming ball that enters the large prize entry port passes through the specific area (V passage) during small hit play, it becomes a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed based on the V passage. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that circulate game balls inside the machine (so-called "enclosed game machines").

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the jackpot probability could be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function. However, the types (number) of jackpot probabilities are not limited to this, and it may be possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than the low probability (first probability) and lower than the high probability (second probability). Furthermore, it may be possible to set multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities, such as a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), or a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), and any of these multiple types of probability conditions may be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can variably display identification information (e.g., special symbols) and control the game to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. In some gaming machines of this type, various effects, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of being controlled to the special game state, are executed while the identification information is variably displayed (see, for example, JP 2020-000417 A).

The effects that are executed while the identification information is being displayed variably play an important role in increasing interest in the game, but there is still room for improvement in order to increase interest in the game.

This Reference Invention 1 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase gaming interest.

To solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention employs the following measures:

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player by displaying a variable display of identification information,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests the expectation level controlled by the special game state during a change period from the start to the end of the change display;
a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period;
the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of first suggestion effects, the mode of which varies depending on the degree of expectation, at a first predetermined time during the variable period, and is capable of executing any one of a plurality of second suggestion effects, the mode of which varies depending on the degree of expectation, at a second predetermined time during the variable period after the first predetermined time;
When a first suggestive effect corresponding to a degree of expectation higher than a predetermined degree of expectation is executed at the first predetermined time, execution of a second suggestive effect corresponding to a degree of expectation lower than the predetermined degree of expectation is suppressed at the second predetermined time;
The period effect execution means is capable of executing the period effect at any one of a plurality of execution times during the variable period,
The gist of the invention is that the ratio of the period effects being executed at a specific execution time among the plurality of execution times is configured to differ depending on whether or not the special game state is in effect.

With this type of gaming machine, during the variable period from the start to the end of the display of the changing identification information, a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect that suggest the expectation level (hereinafter simply referred to as "expectation level") of being controlled in the special gaming state, as well as a periodic effect that indicates the passage of a predetermined period, can be executed at their respective timings. The timing (first predetermined time) at which the first suggestive effect is executed precedes the timing (second predetermined time) at which the second suggestive effect is executed, and when a first suggestive effect (first suggestive effect in a high expectation mode) corresponding to an expectation level higher than the predetermined expectation level is executed, it becomes less likely that a second suggestive effect (second suggestive effect in a low expectation mode) corresponding to an expectation level lower than the predetermined expectation level will be executed after the first suggestive effect (execution of the second suggestive effect in a low expectation mode is suppressed). Furthermore, there are multiple timings (execution times) at which periodic effects can be executed, and the proportion of timeic effects executed at specific timings (specific execution times) among the multiple timings (execution times) differs depending on whether the game is controlled in the special gaming state or not. Therefore, depending on the type of suggestive effect and the timing of the periodic effect, it is possible to effectively heighten the player's anticipation for the special game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the suggestive and periodic effects, increasing their enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
A specific performance execution means is provided which can execute a specific performance in any one of a plurality of modes before the execution of the period performance,
The periodic effect execution means is capable of executing the periodic effect after the specific effect is executed,
The gist of the invention is that the rate at which the periodic effects are executed varies depending on the type of the specific effects that are executed.

With this type of gaming machine, once a specific effect is executed, a periodic effect may be executed afterwards, and the rate at which periodic effects are executed varies depending on the type of specific effect executed first. As a result, the specific effect functions as a hint regarding the execution of the periodic effect. This can attract the player's interest in the type of specific effect and whether or not the periodic effect will be executed, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect even when the period effect is not executed.

With this type of gaming machine, special effects can be executed even when period effects are not executed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the execution of special effects. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the effect of the effects.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 described above,
The game machine is provided with an operating means operable by a player,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing, as the second suggestion effect, a special suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the special game state,
The gist of the invention is that the special suggestion effect is not executed at the operation corresponding time when the operation means is operated, but is configured so that the special suggestion effect can be executed at a time after the operation corresponding time.
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
The game machine is provided with an operating means operable by a player,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing, as the second suggestion effect, a special suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the special game state,
The gist of the invention is that the special suggestion effect is not executed at the operation corresponding time when the operation means is operated, but is configured so that the special suggestion effect can be executed at a time after the operation corresponding time.

With this type of gaming machine, a special suggestion effect that suggests control to a special gaming state can be executed as a second suggestion effect that is executed after the first suggestion effect during the variable period. The special suggestion effect is not executed at the operation response time corresponding to the operation of the operating means, but may be executed at a time after the operation response time. Therefore, even if a special suggestion effect is not executed in response to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation for the subsequent execution of the special suggestion effect (i.e., the special gaming state). This makes it possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration when a special suggestion effect is executed after the operation timing of the operating means (operation response time).

The above-described invention 1 makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of playing games.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can variably display identification information (e.g., special symbols) and control the game to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. In some gaming machines of this type, various effects, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of being controlled to the special game state, are executed while the identification information is variably displayed (see, for example, JP 2020-000417 A).

The effects that are executed while the identification information is being displayed variably play an important role in increasing interest in the game, but there is still room for improvement in order to increase interest in the game.

Reference Invention 2 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase gaming interest.

To solve the above-mentioned problems, this Reference Invention 2 employs the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player by displaying a variable display of identification information,
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period;
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect at different rates when the period effect is being executed and when the period effect is not being executed,
The second suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect after a predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed,
When the first suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the periodic effect and the second suggestive effect is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period displayed in the periodic effect, the degree of expectation suggested by one of the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect may be higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the other suggestive effect,
The period effect execution means is capable of executing the period effect in any one of a plurality of display modes,
The gist of the invention is that the ratio at which the period effects are executed in a specific display mode among the plurality of display modes is different depending on whether or not the special game state is controlled.

In this type of gaming machine, in the variable display of the identification information, a first suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation (hereinafter simply referred to as "expectation") controlled by the special gaming state can be executed at different rates depending on whether a periodic effect displaying the passage of a predetermined period is being executed. Furthermore, in the variable display of the identification information, a second suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation, separate from the first suggestive effect, can be executed after the passage of the predetermined period displayed by the periodic effect. Furthermore, when the first suggestive effect is executed while the periodic effect is being executed and the second suggestive effect is executed after the passage of the predetermined period displayed by the periodic effect, i.e., when both the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are executed in conjunction with the periodic effect, the first suggestive effect may be a suggestive effect with a higher expectation than the second suggestive effect, or the second suggestive effect may be a suggestive effect with a higher expectation than the first suggestive effect. Furthermore, there are multiple display modes for the periodic effect, and the rate at which the periodic effect is executed in a specific display mode among the multiple display modes is configured to differ depending on whether or not the special gaming state is being controlled. Therefore, depending on the execution status of each of the period effect, first suggestion effect, and second suggestion effect, it is possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation for the special game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the period effect, first suggestion effect, and second suggestion effect, and increase the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player by displaying a variable display of identification information,
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for displaying the passage of a predetermined period over the predetermined period;
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect at different rates when the period effect is being executed and when the period effect is not being executed,
The second suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect after a predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed,
the periodic effect execution means is capable of executing the periodic effect for any predetermined period among a plurality of predetermined periods,
The execution rate of the first suggestion effect is configured to be different between a case where the period effect is executed for a first predetermined period among the plurality of predetermined periods and a case where the period effect is executed for a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period,
The period effect execution means is capable of executing the period effect in any one of a plurality of display modes,
The gist of the invention is that the ratio at which the period presentation is executed in a predetermined display mode among the plurality of display modes is different depending on whether or not the special game state is controlled.

With this gaming machine, in the display of the changing identification information, a first suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed at different rates depending on whether a periodic effect displaying the passage of a predetermined period is being executed. Furthermore, in the display of the changing identification information, a second suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed after the predetermined period displayed in the periodic effect has elapsed, separate from the first suggestive effect. The execution rate of the first suggestive effect is configured to differ between when the periodic effect is executed for a first predetermined period and when it is executed for a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period. Furthermore, there are multiple display modes for the periodic effect, and the rate at which the periodic effect is executed in a specific display mode among the multiple display modes is configured to differ between when the special game state is activated and when it is not. Therefore, depending on the execution status of each of the periodic effect, the first suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect, it is possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation for the special game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the periodic effect, the first suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect, and increase the player's enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above,
A specific performance execution means is provided which can execute a specific performance in any one of a plurality of modes before the execution of the period performance,
The periodic effect execution means is capable of executing the periodic effect after the specific effect is executed,
The gist of the invention is that the rate at which the periodic effects are executed varies depending on the type of the specific effects that are executed.

With this type of gaming machine, a periodic effect can be executed after a specific effect is executed, and the rate at which the periodic effect is executed varies depending on the type of specific effect executed first. As a result, the specific effect functions as a hint regarding the execution of the periodic effect. This attracts the player's interest in the type of specific effect and whether or not the periodic effect will be executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect even when the period effect is not executed.

This type of gaming machine allows specific effects to be executed even when period effects are not executed. This prevents excessive restrictions on the execution of specific effects. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effects.

The above-mentioned Reference Invention 2 makes it possible to improve the skill and interest of the user.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that display a variable representation of identification information (e.g., a special symbol) and, when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner (e.g., a jackpot manner), can be controlled to enter a special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. In some gaming machines of this type, various effects, such as effects that suggest the likelihood of being controlled to the special gaming state, are executed while the identification information is displayed (see, for example, JP 2020-000417 A).

The effects that are executed while the identification information is being displayed variably play an important role in increasing interest in the game, but there is still room for improvement in order to increase interest in the game.

Reference Invention 3 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase gaming interest.

To solve the above-mentioned problems, this reference invention 3 employs the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner by performing a variable display of the identification information,
a game state control means for controlling the game state in which the variable display is executable to at least a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state;
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
a first operation instruction performance execution means capable of executing a first operation instruction performance instructing a player to perform a first predetermined operation in the variable display;
A second operation instruction performance execution means capable of executing a second operation instruction performance instructing a player to perform a second predetermined operation in the variable display;
a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period;
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect at different rates when the period effect is being executed and when the period effect is not being executed,
The second suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect after a predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed,
When the first suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the periodic effect and the second suggestive effect is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period displayed in the periodic effect, the degree of expectation suggested by one of the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect may be higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the other suggestive effect,
The gist of the invention is that the rate at which the identification information is controlled to the second game state is different between when the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the first operation instruction presentation is executed on the variable display and when the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the second operation instruction presentation is executed on the variable display.

In this type of gaming machine, in the display of the changing identification information, a first suggestive effect that suggests the expectation level (hereinafter simply referred to as "expectation level") controlled by the special game state can be executed at a rate that varies depending on whether or not a periodic effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period is being executed. Furthermore, in the display of the changing identification information, a second suggestive effect that suggests the expectation level, separate from the first suggestive effect, can be executed after the predetermined period displayed in the periodic effect has elapsed. Furthermore, in the display of the changing identification information, a first operation instruction effect that instructs the player to perform a first predetermined operation and a second operation instruction effect that instructs the player to perform a second predetermined operation can be executed. Then, when the first suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the periodic effect and the second suggestive effect is executed after the predetermined period displayed in the periodic effect has elapsed, i.e., when both the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are executed in conjunction with the periodic effect, the first suggestive effect may be a suggestive effect with a higher expectation level than the second suggestive effect, or the second suggestive effect may be a suggestive effect with a higher expectation level than the first suggestive effect. Furthermore, while the gaming state in which the variable display of the identification information can be executed is at least controlled to the first gaming state and controlled to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, the variable display of the identification information is configured so that the proportion of the second gaming state is different between when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the first operation instruction effect is executed and when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the second operation instruction effect is executed. Therefore, depending on the execution status of each of the period effect, first suggestion effect, second suggestion effect, and operation instruction effect, it is possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation for the special gaming state and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the period effect, first suggestion effect, second suggestion effect, and operation instruction effect, and increase the player's interest in the gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner by performing a variable display of the identification information,
a game state control means for controlling the game state in which the variable display is executable to at least a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state;
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
a first operation instruction performance execution means capable of executing a first operation instruction performance instructing a player to perform a first predetermined operation in the variable display;
A second operation instruction performance execution means capable of executing a second operation instruction performance instructing a player to perform a second predetermined operation in the variable display;
a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for displaying the passage of a predetermined period over the predetermined period;
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect at different rates when the period effect is being executed and when the period effect is not being executed,
The second suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect after a predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed,
the periodic effect execution means is capable of executing the periodic effect for any predetermined period among a plurality of predetermined periods,
The execution rate of the first suggestion effect is configured to be different between a case where the period effect is executed for a first predetermined period among the plurality of predetermined periods and a case where the period effect is executed for a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period,
The gist of the invention is that the rate at which the identification information is controlled to the second game state is different between when the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the first operation instruction presentation is executed on the variable display and when the identification information is displayed in the specific manner after the second operation instruction presentation is executed on the variable display.

With this type of gaming machine, in the display of the changing identification information, a first suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed at a rate that differs depending on whether or not a period effect showing the passage of a predetermined period is being executed. Furthermore, in the display of the changing identification information, a second suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation can be executed, separate from the first suggestion effect, after the passage of the predetermined period displayed in the period effect. Furthermore, in the display of the changing identification information, a first operation instruction effect instructing the player to perform a first predetermined operation and a second operation instruction effect instructing the player to perform a second predetermined operation can be executed. The execution rate of the first suggestion effect is configured to differ between when the period effect is executed for the first predetermined period and when it is executed for a second predetermined period that is longer than the first predetermined period. Furthermore, while the gaming state in which the variable display of the identification information can be executed is at least controlled to the first gaming state and controlled to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, the variable display of the identification information is configured so that the proportion of the second gaming state is different between when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the first operation instruction effect is executed and when the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the second operation instruction effect is executed. Therefore, depending on the execution status of each of the period effect, first suggestion effect, second suggestion effect, and operation instruction effect, it is possible to effectively stimulate the player's anticipation for the special gaming state and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in each of the period effect, first suggestion effect, second suggestion effect, and operation instruction effect, and increase the player's interest in the gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above,
The gist of the present invention is that the execution of the second operation instruction presentation is restricted during at least one of a predetermined pre-execution period before the first operation instruction presentation is executed and a predetermined post-execution period after the first operation instruction presentation is executed, and during the period during which the first operation instruction presentation is executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the execution of the second operation instruction effect is restricted during either or both of the predetermined pre-execution period before the first operation instruction effect is executed and the predetermined post-execution period after it is executed. The execution of the second operation instruction effect is also restricted during the period in which the first operation instruction effect is executed. This makes it less likely that the effect of the first predetermined operation (the effect of the first operation instruction effect) will be impaired. This makes it easier for the player to experience the effect of the first predetermined operation.

The above-mentioned Reference Invention 3 makes it possible to improve the skill and interest of the player.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 Game board, 3 Play area, 4 Rail member, 7 Image display device, 7a Display screen, 7b Performance symbol display area, 7c Judgment symbol display area, 8 Performance symbol, 8s Judgment symbol, 9a First performance hold, 9b Second performance hold, 9c First performance hold display area, 9d Second performance hold display area, 9e Variable hold display area, 10 Center decorative body, 13 Decorative member, 14 Movable performance member, 15 Movable lamp, 16 Game pin, 19 Fixed winning device, 20 First start opening, 21 Second start opening, 22 Variable winning device, 28 Gate, 30 Large winning opening, 31 Large winning device, 40 Main display, 41a First special symbol display, 41b Second special symbol display, 50 Gaming machine frame, 51 Front frame, 52 Main frame, 53 Outer frame, 60: Launch handle, 63a: First effect button, 63b: Second effect button, 66: Frame lamp, 67: Speaker, 80: Main control board, 81: Game control microcomputer, 90: Sub-control board, 91: Effect control microcomputer, 100: Image control board, 101: Image control microcomputer, 106: Audio control board, 107: Lamp control board, 901-912: Effect images.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to a player by displaying a variable indication of identification information based on acquisition information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition ,
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect that suggests an expectation level controlled by the special game state in the variable display;
a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect that displays the passage of a predetermined period;
a storage means for storing the acquired information as pending information;
a storage display means for displaying a storage display in accordance with the hold information stored in the storage means;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect that displays the stored display in a display mode different from normal ;
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect so that an execution rate differs between a case where the period effect is executed and a case where the period effect is not executed ,
The second suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect after a predetermined period displayed by the period effect has elapsed,
When the first suggestion effect is executed together with the period effect and the second suggestion effect is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period displayed by the period effect, the expectation level suggested by one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be higher than the expectation level suggested by the other suggestion effect,
The period effect execution means is capable of executing the period effect in any one of a plurality of display modes,
The ratio of the period effects being executed in a specific display mode among the plurality of display modes is configured to be different between when the special game state is controlled and when it is not controlled,
When the memory display is displayed in a special display mode due to the execution of the specific effect, the period effect can be executed in the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the memory display displayed in the special display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine described in claim 1, characterized in that there are multiple types of special display modes, and the rate at which the period effect is executed varies depending on the type of special display mode when the memory display is displayed in the special display mode due to the execution of the specific effect .